Home

USER`S MANUAL - Power Drive Services

1. Bae Ad Normal inverse 2 9 k oo gt x A operation 8 e Polarity Continue to run gt Gain Bias C35 1 C91 12 Filter i C35 1 requency at 12 Offset ae T CE 0 limiter thermistor 0 Hardware C1 Mode 0 limiter elenco IER switch C1 function selection SW7 C1 E59 0 H26 0 C1 OO O E i a Normalinverse ieu O 9 I operation I I E Continuen O Bias 0 C1 function frequency at a Hard thermistor C1 Filter C1 C1 function C50 O limiter ware C1 Mode C1 function E65 gt switch C1 function selection Offset Reference loss 1 SW7 V2 E59 1 H26 0 detection PONI DEEP i Normal inverse 9 0 ol LE io Toi EH m I 2 101 Continue to run OI Gai Bias E C1 V2 function frequency at i va e i Dg m omi Offset Reference loss detection y Normal inverse gt x operation BIG Gain i thermistor C32 X C34 Hardware Mode m Normal nverse switch selection gt gi operation SW8 ON H26 1 O O O NES Gain El Aral C37 X 39 J Compa ona x Normalinverse PTC rator gt i operation thermistor Level Gain UP DOWN control Initial frequency setting UP d comman n DOWN DOWN control com
2. Same as above E F Same as above 3041 L Same as above EX Figure 3 10 Alarm Information Menu Transition 3 29 e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Tum the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and Keys to display Alarm Information amp a 3 Press the 5 key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g O 1 In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the or key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recent oneas 2 2 3 and 4 5 While the alarm code is displayed press the key to have the corresponding alarm item number e g 6_ 00 and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of approximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g 6_ 01 and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the 5 and keys 6 Press the 55 key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 19 Alarm Information Displayed LED monitor shows Item displayed Description
3. 10 ED models Intermittent braking Braki ist Continuous braking Period L h Bee raking resistor l 100 braking torque Period Less than Resistance 100s supply Inverter type E Q Discharging Braking Allowable voltage EN Duty Type Qty capacity time average ED kWs s loss kW FRNO IEIS 2LI 1000 100 FRNO 2E1S 20 500 75 DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 FRNO 4EIS 2LI 250 37 FRNO 75E1S 20 133 20 FRNI SEIS 2LI 73 14 Toree DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 phase FRN2 2E1S 20 50 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 FRNS 5E1S 20 DB5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275 ji FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 FRNIIEIS 22L DBII 2C 10 55 10 0 55 FRNISEIS 22L DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75 FRNO 4E1S 40 250 37 DBO 75 4C 200 50 0 075 FRNO 75E1S 40 133 20 FRNI SEIS 4LI 1 73 14 DB2 2 4C 160 55 0 110 FRN2 2E1S 40 50 e rue ERES DB O 130 140 75 0 185 8 loo y FRN4 0E15 4B PB3 7 l ji FRNS SEIS 4L DB5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 10 n FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 FRNIIEIS 4L DBII 4C 40 55 10 0 55 2 FRNISEIS 4L DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 9 FRNO 1E1S 70 1000 100 9 FRNO 2E1S 70 500 75 Single DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 02 phase FRN0 4E1S 70 250 37 200 V ERNO 75E1S 70 133 20 FRN1 5E1S 70 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 FRN2 2E1S 70 50 10 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series
4. esses Effect of invertersion other devices inen rere ee Ep erede tides eve ii Nolse CAII R Sar Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage ai ai Application to general purpose INVErtelS ooocoocnoncnocccononononononnnonnnonnnnnncnnn cono nn nn enemies Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or Special high voltage s n tte terit ei tede eire ae T Epe AEE E ESEE SENERE ip c dias Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters Generating mechanism of surge voltages nete nennen enne enne ne nnne nenne Effect of surge voltages 4 4 RA Countermeasures against surge voltages onocnonncnnnnonnonconnoncnncnonononnnonnnn conc nennen enne nre nneneen rene tnene Regarding existing equipment esses enne enne a tentent tenerent neret nennen Inverter Generating LOSS uana cU p a hor RR ie e tei bee edant Conyersion from SI Units vecs Allowable Current of Insulated Wires essent nennen nenne nennen nennen innen Replacement Informations zoo e ERG oO External dimensions comparison tables sess enne nnne Terminal arrangements and symbols sssssssssssssseseeeeeeeenee nnne ener enne ente n nennen Function Codes e UD RE RTI RE Tof a E ates Glossary xi Part 1 General Information C
5. DAR Mota til T Bi dul o pas DGA i M ll THA Mole d hn y i Mota 2 E Va d MECE an be iNo 3 Man cincuit nuit Fowar ELCB uc Pi si DB man Thiee phane e LR pul single phase zu ud aa A 00 to 240 Vv Ty RE EM a Las 5060 Hz zz mT 1 i T or fhrga phasa A o LT mg 360 bi ABI Y Sod biz SMa Grounding lamina r aec ca Grounding terminal ta Comino cirit ee o TEE o tit Tse meee E 00 T i SANT o 14 Wa m Q m FMA BE s LLE pnr 158 mnm Monier j DEMI 3al Mor ary Tauli m Boa FMP 9 W 7 FWD MU i REY Transistor output EM ZIRE E vl MOCB Molded nase orul breaker T ere ELE Earnf iaknga circuit breakar l a MC Magnetic contactor i pia Swit OCR DC reactor po DER Braking resistor eh R5 E2h poi fopon MCCB or ELCB when necessary REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 8 27 When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apar
6. 2 n Fixed reli i Rola on speed control Position Upper limit perite enean m Dancer ral Position Aeference ty P Position data J a z ri I Imeartar l 1 M ex d vio Wy Cw Potentiometes E v 3 Police Lower lime hs Tr M O The Innere contrata dua ne pod with relenence of the dancer roll position B e Speed command l i oo t Te i I Pirri commer E RA Frequency command A A NERE EDAM E Uppar limit FID remola command Buf gt PB x i Dancer reference posetion ds T processor Lower limit FID feadbarck IDanzer position fendbaci LL Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block m Mode Selection J01 JO1 selects the PID control mode Data for J01 Function Disable Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control Using JO1 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control output so you can specify an increase decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference error component between the commanded input and feedback amounts making it possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners The IVS terminal command can also switch operation between normal and inverse For details of swi
7. Analog setting signal filter 0 00 to 5 00s P Motor parameters FVR E11S Analog Input adjustment for 12 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s FRENIC Multi Functi on code Name Data setting range Functi on code Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S P01 Motor 1 Number of poles Capacity Rated current On line tuning No load current R1 setting Slip compensation control Slip compensation response time 2 to 14 P01 0 01 to 5 50 kW 3 7 kW or less 0 01 to 11 0 kW 5 5 7 5 kW P02 0 00 to 99 9 A P03 0 Inactive 1 Active R1 and X 2 Active R1 X and lo 0 Inactive 1 Active 0 00 to 99 9 A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 0 01 to 10 00 s A 43 Motor 1 No of poles Rated slip frequency Slip compensation response time 2 to 22 0 01 to 11 0 kW 0 00 to 99 9A 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped and no load current while running 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 00 to 50 00A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz Set PO9 and P11 data to 100 0 01 to 10 00 s H High performance functions FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Data setting range Equi
8. Limited Life Component Service Life Main circuit capacitors 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Conditions Ambient temperature is 40 C and load factor is 80 of the inverter s rated current B Noise is reduced by the built in EMC filter Use of a built in EMC filter that reduces noise generated by the inverter makes it possible to reduce the effect on peripheral equipment Expanded capacity range and abundant model variation B Standard Series Irieut pxowes Hamina appned melon mW surely 02 4 E 15 22 N 5 T5 ii phase rl iaie 3008 i phase HN Figure 1 1 B Semi standard Series Available soon Models with built in EMC filter Models with built in PG interface card Models with built in RS 485 communications card Models for synchronous motors Figure 1 2 The highest standards of control and performance in its class E Shortened setting time in slip compensation control Through slip compensation control voltage tuning speed control accuracy at low speeds is improved This minimizes variations in speed control accuracy at times when the load varies and since the time at creep speeds is shortened single cycle tact times can be shortened Reikna ns F wrin Lead O NN Figure 1 3 B Equipped with the highest level CPU for its class The highest level CPU of any inverter is used Computation and processing capacity is doubl
9. Select monitor item Setting frequency command Select what is to be displayed here from Enter or select the set frequency command to write it into the inverter output frequency current etc Click Apply to make it effective lO terminal status Shows status of the programmable I O terminals of the inverter Indicating Operation status ES mpg rn EE Shows SSS N FWD famem o e REV STOP and Alarm codes Operation buttons GLATI Selecting monitor item Update the inverter info Switching frequency and run Select the operation status information to for the latest ones command sources be monitored real time Click the Refresh button to Select the frequency and run update running status of the command sources and apply them inverter shown on the Loader by clicking Apply screen Loader will become to show the latest inverter status Refer to the table shown below for details of the operation buttons The indented appearance of the FWD button as shown in the figure above indicates that it is active for running the motor forward while that of the REV button is same for running reverse Stops the motor Run the motor forward Run the motor reverse Resets all alarm information saved in the selected inverter 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms This function allows you to monitor up to 4 analog readouts and up to 8 digital ON OFF signa
10. P DB rel Current Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 90 C 01 FRNOTe1s 20 20 02 FRNO 2E1S 20 2 04 FRNO 4E1S 20 2 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 2D 2 0 20 37 20 20 20 16 0 75 0 75 0 75 to to to 1 25 1 25 1 25 Nominal applied motor kW Power supply voltage Inverter grounding Inverter type NTN M D ojojo N o N TH N o N 2 0 N o N o o Three phase 200V 15 20 2o 70 2o zo 20 35 22 37 55 s 35 20 r5 FRN7 5E18 20 140 m JFRNttE1S20 220 80 55 517 20 20 20 91 15 04 FRNO4E1S 40 20 20 20 10 29 20 20 08 0 75 2 0 ERN3 7E1540 0 75 0 75 0 75 FRN4 0E1S 4E 2 425 1 25 125 35 20 20 77 29 20 20 31 55 15 01 o2 Jrenozers7a 20 20 20 26 20 20 20 056 A w r ajojo N E N N oj o 1 5 2 2 3 7 4 0 5 5 7 5 a prove 04 _ FRNOsE1S 70 20 20 20 ss 20 20 20 082 e i 0 200V 125 1 25 1 25 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series o
11. Ej Parral Teel leg 20g3j fsmmin Sasa cds aller Maracay pu dis Parra iion Hee tun a pk THE aia AT LLE i ree coma 1 Cet breie Clarice Foor ka n mra P x fa wa iEn dio Faradaga dT T cada DC bre Drap EPA manor clip or ers Kang fom Fallo emi Tot nien 12 40 bo 1D 0 1 O WHEE Fa il i ade cha Fa C rwda bici cad 7n Moke dvd Ea Congar pent 5 Tl a 1 Lad A a ET 2 laj a gan sag na p cada Fare edm A a iem Een a Cereri i CH ides zar DC nage uar ed ruens Viii ema ini 1i a 3 espe maur Termina 17 mas Cored ingas Verrmausi C 1j E DEI LRL UI Ir Comparison You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the inverter To perform a comparison and review the result displayed click the Comparison tab and then click the Compared with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab and specify the file name The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list File information Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function code editing file 1 Property Shows file name inverter model inverter s capacity date of readout etc 2 Comments Displays the comments you have entered You can write any comments necessary for identifying the file 5 2 3 2 Multi monitor This feature lists the status of all the inverters that a
12. Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Multi series and the recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC Multi series and an overview of terminal blocks including a description of the LED display and keys on the keypad Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b or RS 485 Communications Card OPC E1 RS Installation Manual INR SI47 1089 for details Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Multi s configuration wit
13. A control that keeps an inverter output frequency within the specified current limit Cursor Marker blinking on the four digit 7 segment LED monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit can be changed modified by keying operation Curvilinear V f pattern A generic name for the inverter output patterns with curvilinear relation between the frequency and voltage Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 5 H codes DC braking DC braking DC current braking that an inverter injects into the motor to brake and stop it against the moment of inertia of the motor or its load The inertial energy generated 1s consumed as heat in the motor If a motor having the load with large moment of inertia is going to stop abruptly the moment of inertia may force to rotate the motor after the inverter output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz Use DC braking to stop the motor completely Related function codes F20 to F22 and A09 to A11 DC link bus voltage Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of the converter part of inverters The part rectifies the input AC power to charge the DC link bus capacitor as the DC power to be inverted to AC power Deceleration time Period during which an inverter slows its output frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz Related function codes F03 F08 E11 and H54 Digital input Input signals given to the programmable input terminals or the programmable input terminals
14. Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S FMA voltage output adjustment 0 to 99 Analog output FM Voltage adjustment 65 to 103 65 103 65 99 x FVR E9S s data No of poles of motor 2 to 12 even Motor 1 No of poles 2 to 22 even Coefficient for speed indication 0 01 to 200 0 Coefficient for speed indication 0 01 to 200 00 Motor sound adjustment Carrier frequency 0 1 to 15 kHz Motor sound Carrier frequency 0 75 1 to 15 kHz Times of auto reset Auto reset Times Restart mode after momentary power failure 0 Inactive Trip and alarm when power failure occurs 1 Inactive Trip and alarm when power recovers 2 Active Restarts at output frequency of before power failure Active Restarts at starting frequency Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection 0 Disable restart Trip immediately 1 Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Electronic thermal overload relay for motor 1 Select Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 0 00 Active for 4 pole standard motor Active f
15. Disable Decelerate to stop Coast to a stop Hit mechanical stop J66 Operation condition Enable at constant speed and during deceleration Enable at constant speed Enable anytime J63 J67 Timer J68 Braking Signal Brake OFF current J69 Brake OFF frequency J70 Brake OFF timer J71 Brake ON frequency J72 Brake ON timer J73 Reserved 2 J74 J75 376 377 378 379 J80 J81 J82 J83 J84 J85 J86 0 Manual mode 1 Auto mode When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad 9 12 9 1 Function Code Tables Data Default Refer to copying setting page 1 RS 485 Communication Standard 1to 255 9 119 yo Station address yo2 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm er 8 1 Trip with alarm er 8 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer yO3 If the retry fails trip with
16. Disable Disable Enable m Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating fuae Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time f an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Thetorque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Allowable average loss These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss respectively Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor as listed on the following pages Note Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the elec
17. LCD Monitor Item selection E45 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the multi function keypad is in Running mode Data for E45 Function Running status rotational direction and operation guide Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque LED monitor indicators r min m min kW X10 min sec PID Running v v v v v v v v status Rotational direction Operation guide A A A A A Indicators for FWD REV STOP REM LOC running status and source of operation Example of display for E45 1 during running oO a gt c o Hz A V r min m min kW X10 min sec PID e v v Yy v v v v h v v v Output frequency Output current Bar charts T Cli yn ae FoutrloutrTROQ Calculated torque S3009 NOILONNA A A aA A A A FWD REV STOP REM LOG COMM JOG HAND Full scale values on bar charts Item displayed Full scale Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output current Inverter rated current x 200 Calculated torque Motor rated torque x 200 LCD Monitor Language selection E46 specifies the language to display on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E46 Language 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian E47 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E47 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
18. Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern m Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Mote If FOS Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through H53 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect Examples B Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maxi
19. cee ngere ea eiea aaora A AEEA a E EAEE OAA ERTSE RS 8 27 8 6 2 Running the inverter by terminal commands eese nennen nennen rennen 8 28 8 7 Protective Funct Ons ee ette e epi r de O ie 8 30 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 9 1 Function Code Tables rd eec te a es 9 92 Overview of Function Codes eei aeta ei t ide v dE v e ee dris 9 14 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions sees nennen enne ennt rnsn enr er rennen erret n neni 9 14 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal fUNC IONS oconoocnooncoonnnonnnononnconnnononnnnonoconononn cnn nnnonn cnc nr eni 9 43 9 2 3 C codes Control functions sessi eene eerte nnne enr ee tnnt entrer rr nono nn co nn nana n serre nn neni 9 70 9 2 4 P codes Motor 1 parameters 0 0 0 cee ceescecsseceseeecsseceeneecesecesaeeceseeesaeecsseeesaeeceseeesaeeceeeseneeceeeseneecees 9 77 9 2 5 Hcodes High performance functions isses e a eene nennen entren nennen enn entere 9 80 9 2 6 Acodes Motor 2 parameters ooooocoonncnnnccnonenononcnnnncnnnnconononnnncnnn nro nennen en nn none nr nn encon nr nn nest EEE EE en 9 102 9 2 7 J codes Application f nctions is sesen eene nennen nennen trennen ie Aai aaea i 9 104 9 2 8 y codes Link functions eesis eee dene entren re rero derer ep edades 9 119 App A A 2 A 3 App B B 1 B 2 App C C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 App D App E App F App G Gl G2 G3 Appendices Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise
20. im Man namanlata Power Dimensions mm y supply Inverter type LR voltage D pi as Q naa fies E TE 10 8 p Dn FRNO 4E1S 2L a 5 co Rugs FRNO 75E1S 20 132 50 oie FRNO 1E18 70 S Tl pn FRNO 2E1S 7H 32 gat 1 m 00 V FRNO 4E1S 70 107 25 Q FRNO 75E1S 70 152 102 50 Note A box LI in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending gt on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 9 n n a E D s E jJ Du I 3 i x am B i c uu E fio d i k L i 11 A r d EE ax als Main namepiala Power Dimensions mm supply Inverter type voltage 5 Di pe Three FRNO 4E1S 40 126 40 phase 86 400 V FRNO 75E1S 40 150 64 8 23 Note A box LI in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination Unit mm Main nameplate Power Dimensions mm supply Inverter type voltage B e E Three FRN1 5E18 20 Doe FRN2 2E1S 20 eee 150 86 Three FRN1 5E1S 40 phase 64 400 V FRN2 2E1S 40 Single phase FRN1 5E1S 70 160 96 200 V Note A box LI in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Main nameplate y Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 FRN3 7E1S 40 FRN4 0E1S 4E Single phase 200 V FRN2 2E1S 70
21. 1 J s 1 W 1 033 kg cm 0 102 kgf m s 5 Rotation speed r min rad s 0 1047 rad s rad s E r min 9 549 r min T ddy A 21 2 Calculation formula 1 Torque power and rotation speed 2n e P W x W 60 N r min e t Nem P W 1 026 N r min T kgf m e T Nem 495522 N r min T kgf m 0 974 SPON N r min 2 Kinetic energy e ED J Kg m N G min 182 4 EQ GD kg m N min 730 3 Torque of linear moving load Driving mode Mars ea Ny r min ng T kgf m o as Ny r min ng Braking mode a O EN Ny r min ng TE 501594 ua ED Kiop Ny r min ng 4 Acceleration torque Driving mode J kg m AN r min 9 55 At s ng GD kg m AN r min 375 At S TG e t Nem T kgf m Braking mode J kg m AN r min ng 955 At s GD kgem AN r min ng 375 At s t Nem T kgfem 5 Acceleration time J J5 ng kgem AN r min t tL Ng Nem 9 55 GD GD ng kgs m AN r min Tu Tri ng kgf m 375 tacc s tacc S 6 Deceleration time Ji J2 eng kg m AN r min TM 7 tL lg Nem 9 55 tpgc S amp GD GD ng kg m AN r min TM Tr ng kgf m 375 tpec S A 22 App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires App F Allowable C
22. 864 440 Ya xg ug O_O Ll juawdinbs 10H ig m 8019 0 H 9 ggp su uod gp lg Z 8641 430 xa ped sy prepueis Or v o 0 onan A34 9s1o 01 ung GM premio ung uonoeJip Buryejo ul PIOH eum uomneiedo Jeu NO A3H jul pue NO GM4 4 430 01 pe2104 uonesado jeu g1 snq piel 10 Sgp SH BIA yul suogeoiunuuuioo eiqeu3 Hn An 0 A348 0M3 204 poyjow uoneledo ped ex aH paiqesip piod uonounj niniv uone1edo uone1edo am eiqeu3 DuibDof 10 peay Figure 4 2 Drive Command Block 4 6 4 3 Drive Command Block Figure 4 2 shows the processes that generate the final drive commands FWD Drive the motor in the forward direction and REV Drive the motor in reverse direction through the various run commands and switching steps by means of function codes Additional and supplemental information is given below For the inverter operation given by the amp amp s key on the standard keypad the generator holds the run command ON upon depression of the ani key decides the motor rotation direction according to the run forward command FWD or the run reverse command REV and releases the hold state upon depression of the Enzi key For the inverter operation given by the 9 key on the multi function keypad the generator holds the command ON upon depression of the 5 key and releases the hold state upon depression of the En key The 3 wire
23. B New system for more energy efficient operation Previous energy saving operation functions worked only to control the motor s loss to keep it at a minimum in accordance with the load condition In the newly developed FRENIC Multi Series the focus has been switched away from the motor alone to both the motor and the inverter as electrical products As a result we incorporated a new control system optimum and minimum power control that minimizes the power consumed by the inverter itself inverter loss and the loss of the motor Way of thinking conceming power used Cntimum control of the entire system v ensiihol iovis TFREMIC MuRE 1 supply Mew cor UM Pe UA ar Pe Figure 1 15 B Smooth starts through the auto search In the case where a fan is not being run by the inverter but is turning free the fan s speed is checked regardless of its rotational direction and operation of the fan is picked up to start the fan smoothly This function is convenient in such cases as when switching instantaneously from commercial power supply to the inverter Errar supply ae o volage jel Rotational speed 1500 emin 7 Output i frequency 50 Hz cb AS E Curent wmm i Figure 1 16 1 7 B Equipped with a full range of PID control functions Differential alarm and absolute value alarm outputs have been added for PID regulator which carry out process controls such as temperature pressu
24. C1 function Pulse train input Max 30 kHz Maximum output frequency when the optional PG interface card is installed Remarks Acceleration deceleration time Frequency limiter Upper limit and lower limit frequencies Bias Gain Jump frequency Timer operation 0 00 to 3600 s variable setting Acceleration and deceleration time can be independently set with 2 types and selected with digital input signal 1 point Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types Linear S curve weak S curve strong Curvilinear constant output maximum capacity Shutoff of the run command lets the motor coast to a stop Deceleration time exclusively applied to the force to stop command STOP can be specified setting range 0 00 to 3600 s This setting automatically cancels the S curve setting Acceleration deceleration time during jogging operation can be set Setting range 0 00 to 3600 s 0 to 10094 Jogging operation Auto restart after momentary power failure Hardware current limiter an key standard keypad e input signals keys optional multi function keypad or digital The acceleration and deceleration times dedicated for jogging can be set and they are common Restart at 0 Hz restart from the frequency used before momentary power failure can be selected Motor speed at restart can be searched and restarted load variation or momentar
25. Calculate the harmonic current of each degree using the following equation Generated nth harmonic current 100 nth harmonic current A Fundamental current A x 3 Maximum availability factor For a load for elevators which provides intermittent operation or a load with a sufficient designed motor rating reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the maximum availability factor of the load The maximum availability factor of an appliance means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic generator in operation at which the availability reaches the maximum to its total capacity and the capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes In general the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition but the standard values shown in Table B 6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment ddy Table B 6 Availability Factors of Inverters etc for Building Equipment Standard Values Equipment Inverter capacity Single inverter type category availability Air 200 KW or less conditioning mear 025 Refrigerator 50 kW or less freezer UPS 6 pulse 200 kVA 060 Correction coefficient according to contract demand level Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases calculating reduced harmonics with the correction coefficient B defined in Table B 7 is permitted Table B 7 Correction Coefficient
26. Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable m Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation Using the PG feedback speed control at same time however also disables the slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy B PG speed feedback control PG interface This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator PG interface card It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high accuracy fols In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control the inverter uses the motor parameters to control its speed Therefore the following conditions should be satisfied if not the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor A single motor should be controlled It is difficult to apply this control to a group motor driving system e Motor parameters P02 P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are fully auto tuned The rating of the motor
27. F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode V f control with slip compensation active Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface m V f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Data for H68 Base frequency or Above the base Accl Decel Constant speed below frequency
28. FWD CIO b m Y2 CMY REV L1 L1 CI CI e X1 d M ES X2 X3 f XF X4 g XR X5 dp ED RST No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XP XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to B Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit O as shown in Table 3 16 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits O to f each With the FRENIC Multi digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit O and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to 0 when it is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are on short circuited and all the others are off open 0005 is displayed on LED4 to LEDI Digital output terminal Y1 and Y2 are assigned to bits O and 1 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A
29. Ltd LIB MCCAH ELCB FEL 323 with PGS aT prision Niele undae rated capacity of mira applied mera im 9 7 aM or kk Poraiisiis bom Fuj Electr Technica Ci Lid Unit mm Figure 6 3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example 3 Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E Figure 6 4 shows their external dimensions and connection examples Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd wa M Three phaga 220 VAC Treoc phasa 440 VAC 111312503 1 TE AL dos CN23232 CN2324E es Mourirg noia Avalable tor Fup Eleciio Technica Ca Lit Unit mm Figure 6 4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples 6 12 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 4 Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors miniature control relays and timers Applicable surge absorber models are the S2 A O and S1 B O Figure 6 5 shows their external dimensions Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japane
30. Note Do not connect the FVR E11S series of inverters since the pin assignment of the keypad is different from that of the FRENIC Multi series Doing so could result in an inverter damage 5 3 G deyo NOLLVOINPIININOO S87 SH HONOYHL BNINNNE 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card The RS 485 Communications Card has two RJ 45 connectors for multi drop connection Each RJ 45 connector has the pin assignment as listed below Signal name Function No connection Reserved for keypad power source Remarks Shield terminal Internally connecting SDs RS 485 data RS 485 data 4 Built in terminating resistor 1120 Open close by SW9 For details about SW9 refer to RS 485 Communication User s Manual MHE448b 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port For connection with the RS 485 communications port be sure to use an appropriate cable and a converter that meet the applicable specifications For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b 5 4 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 5 Communications support devices This section provides information necessary for connection of the inverter to host equipment having no RS 485 communications port such as a PC or for configuring a multi drop connection 1 Communications level converter Most personal computers PC are not equipped with an RS 485 communications port but RS 232C
31. PG pulse rate 1 Z phase Shows the pulse rate p s in Z phase when the PG interface is installed PG pulse rate 2 Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s of the second PG A B phase in quad frequency when two PG interfaces are installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Shows the second PG pulse rate p s in Z phase when two PG interfaces are installed 3 3 Programming Mode m Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminal may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 15 and the figure below each of segments a to g on LEDI lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or X5 is closed it goes off when it is open Segment a and b on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal Y1 or Y2 and terminal CMY and do not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LEDA is for terminals 30A B C Segment a on LEDA lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open on Tip If all terminal input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LED1 to LED4 will blink Table 3 15 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LEDS LEDS LED LEM A 30A B C Y1 CMY
32. The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box L1 in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Three phase 400 V 8 24 8 5 External Dimensions Unit mm Power supply voltage Inverter type FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN5 5E1S 40 Three phase 400 V FRN7 5E1S 40 Note A box LI in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Three phase 200 V 7 v m Q an gt al o Z 0 E m 2R o i i z Tio 10 Main nameplate llo 3g O lla Power supply voltage Inverter type FRN11E1S 20 FRN15E1S 20 FRN11E1S 40 FRN55E1S 40 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V 8 25 8 5 2 Standard keypad Unit mm For remote operation or panel wall mounting The keypad rear cover should be mounted Direrinker ol holes in panel dirani bom Aj 8 26 8 6 Connection Diagrams 8 6 Connection Diagrams 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with the keypad
33. and 30C is open For example if Y1 is on Y2 is off and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 0201 is displayed on the LED4 to LEDI Table 3 16 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 16 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal Binary Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED LED3 LED LED No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XP XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to Bi Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted LL Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communica
34. the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms motor 1 will be driven by default m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking m Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TLZ TLI terminal command is assigned torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 takes effect by default Input terminal command NE TL2 TL1 Torque limiter level Torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 Torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency The U
35. 5th 7th lih 13th us 19th oe s 394 x 10 3940 38 14 5 1 4 1 4 a 9 3940 x 0 55 2167 823 5 5 3142 bc to Tables B 4 and Refer to Table B 5 Example 2 400 V 3 7 kW 15 units w AC reactor and DC reactor and maximum availability 0 55 Fundamental current onto 6 6 KV lines mA Harmonic current onto 6 6 kV lines mA Ra te 1 Ba vem ow Mn es pos 910 1 295 8 i to Tables B 4 and Refer to Table B 5 Harmonic current onto 6 6 kV lines mA 5910 x 0 55 3250 5 App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA March 1995 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market C 1 Preface When an inverter drives a motor surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals If the surge voltages are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages and countermeasures against them Refer to A 2 1 I
36. 9 10 Low 4 High LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 LED Monitor Item selection Refer to the description of E43 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time Refer to the description of E39 es Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data E51 specifies a display coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ 10 in a part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh hee Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After Clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated 9 2 Overview of Function Codes s2 Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below Data for E52 Menu display mode Function code data editing mode Menus to be displayed Menus 0 and 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Note Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 The multi function keypad always displays all the menu items including additional menu items regardless of the E52 data The menus available on the standard keypad are described below Quick Setup LED monitor shows Main functions Displays only basic function codes to customize the
37. A 3 Noise prevention The more noise prevention is strengthened the more effective However with the use of appropriate measures noise problems may be resolved easily It is necessary to implement economical noise prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions 1 Noise prevention prior to installation Before installing an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel you need to consider noise prevention Once noise problems occur it will cost additional materials and time for solving them Noise prevention prior to installation includes 1 Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits 2 Putting main circuit wiring into a metal conduit pipe 3 Using shielded wires or twisted shielded wires for control circuits 4 Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems A 4 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Implementation of noise prevention measures There are two types of noise prevention measures one for noise propagation routes and the other for noise receiving sides that are affected by noise The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring avoiding noise effect The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include 1 Insertin
38. An alarm occurrence i L E Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running sietus holding aar stalus Stop and ready do rur Alarm output put ON OFF Min f ms Resel alam l RST DEF DON OFF m Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 0 2 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to uh immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral equipment 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying i keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input terminal command JOG am i keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Pressing these keys toggles Normal operation between the normal operation and ready for jogging Ready for jogging When the r
39. BCD code or binary data entered via the DIO interface card option For details refer to the DIO Interface Card Instruction Manual Enable the pulse train entered via the PG interface card option For details refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 set function code C35 to 0 Setting C35 to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Terminal C1 can be used for current input C1 function or voltage input V2 function depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and function code E59 In addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multi frequency are provided 6 deyo Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E05 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor Is S3009 NOILONNA Data for FO2 Run Command Source Description Keypad Enables the keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV command External signal Enables terminal co
40. Control circuit Q 10 VDC Resistor 1kQ Operation level C1 Comparator External alarm PTC Resistor thermistor L 2509 11 0V Figure 8 1 Internal Circuit Diagram 11 Analog common Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 and FM Isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 8 9 g deu SNOI VOIJIO3dS Classifi cation Analog input Related Functions function codes Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 8 2 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off c
41. D o Startup Times of Motor 2 H44 Startup Times of Motor 1 Function codes in this section apply to motor 2 For details about motor 1 and motor 2 refer to the descriptions of El to E05 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 MI 9 103 6 deu S3GdO9 NOILONNA 9 2 7 J01 J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J codes Application functions PID Control Mode selection PID Control Remote command SV PID Control P Gain PID Control I Integral time PID Control D Differential time PID Control Feedback filter In PID control the state of control object is detected by a sensor or similar device and is compared with the commanded value e g temperature control command If there is any deviation between them the PID control operates so as to minimize it Namely it is a closed loop feedback system that matches controlled variable feedback amount PID control expands the application area of the inverter to process control such as flow control pressure control temperature control and speed control such as dancer control If PID control is enabled JO1 1 2 or 3 the frequency control of the inverter is switched from the drive frequency command generator block to the PID frequency command generator block PID process control block diagram Manual speed command o O Frequency command PID processor PID feedback 9 104 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Dancer control block diagram
42. For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Frequency Command 1 C30 Frequency Command 2 F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for F01 C30 Function Enable keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable the current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Data for F01 C30 Function Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 A01 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal
43. Operation through RS 485 or field bus option communications Switching operation command Link switching 8 4 Control current limiter This limiter can be canceled Item Frequency command 8 2 Common Specifications Explanation Keypad and keys with data protection function Analog input Analog input can be set with external voltage current input 0to 10 VDC O to 100 terminals 12 C1 V2 function 4 to 20 mA DC O to 100 terminal C1 Note Terminal C1 can be switched to input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 V2 function Multi frequency Selectable from 16 different of frequencies 0 to 15 UP DOWN operation Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input signal is ON Link operation Frequency can be specified via the RS 485 or field bus communications port option Frequency switching Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external signal digital input Changeover between frequency setting and multi frequency setting via communication is available Auxiliary frequency setting Inputs at terminal 12 or C1 C1 V2 function can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings Inverse operation Normal inverse operation can be set or switched with digital input signal and function code setting 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 at terminal 12 and C1 V2 function 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 at terminal C1
44. Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant A08 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant fole Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 B Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for F10 Function For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency 6 deu S3009 NOILONN 4 The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1
45. R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running A19 Online tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable A20 No load current 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard motor A21 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard motor A22 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 Y Rated value of Fuji standard motor A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 lon v v 100 0 A24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 poor Es v oun pes 9 103 A25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 ce USER NN 100 0 A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 0 01 Hz Rated value of Fuji standard motor A39 Motor 2 Selection Motor characteristics O Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors A40 Slip Compensation 2 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above A CU MEN C MEME A EET Damping Gain for Motor 2 A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 Change or reset the cumulative data n n A46 Startup Times of Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup times vl n 6 deyo S3009 NOILONN 4 9 11 J codes Application Functions Default Refer t
46. RS 232C or USB Conversion to RS 485 communication required to connect inverters Monitor resolution XVGA 800 x 600 or higher 1024 x 768 16 bit color or higher is recommended COM port eei COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS COM6 COM7 COM8 PC COM ports assigned to Loader Transmission rate 38400 IRAZU 9600 4800 and 2400 bps 19200 bps or more is recommended Note 3 Character length Prefixed Stop bit length Prefixed Parity Even Prefixed No of retries Transmission requirements None or ff to 10 No of retry times before detecting communications error Timeout setting 100 ms 300 ms 500 ms M to 9 0 s or 10 0 to 60 0 s This setting should be longer than the response interval time set by function code y09 of the inverter Note 1 FRENIC Loader cannot be used with inverters that do not support SX protocol protocol for handling Loader commands With special order made inverters FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function codes normally To use FRENIC Loader on FRENIC Mini series of inverters an RS 485 Communications Card Option OPC C1 RS is required 5 6 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader Note 2 Use a PC with as high a performance as possible since some slow PCs may not properly refresh the operation status monitor and Test run windows Note 3 To use FRENIC Loader on a network where a FRENIC Mini inverter is also c
47. SS1 SS2 LE Frequency O gt Q al limiter High DE e LO Communications l O Q be Primary command Drive frequent inkluneton Bus lnk Iu Q Jump O pi Loader link l l frequency 3 0 2 6 function l go i p 2d D 1 3 to 5 7 8 Frequency IN l I limiter Low 13 SO oH 4 1 lo l Oo i RT uv Multi frequency 1 O EF Multi frequency 2 O l S Multi frequency 3 lo E rA ES O Cancel PID Og l control L Hz PID 5 2 Auxiliary frequency setting 1 aJ z n D o z O Auxiliary frequency setting 2 O O PID control Anti reset windup a 1 Hold PID integral O 3 PID control T component jen Bit 0 PID control PID HLD Upper limit of PID T J62 poe contre process output IO 0 PID output pole Reset PID integral and mls differential components 9 1 a PID RST PID MV Ratio H 15 51 x Je r M processor x O PID control P Gain o 0 PID control MV Speed O d Integral time Q PID control PID control Lower limit of PID Bit 1 PID control D Differential time process output Select compensation of output ratio PID control P Gain 2 PID control Integral time 2 J59 to J61 PID control gt D Differential time 2 J61 within detection width Eg DEM Detection width of dancer position deviation PID alarm processor PID alarm bea n pi PID ALM 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E
48. Selecting the PID control for process control J01 1 or 2 validates the H61 data as well as frequency commands Selecting it for dancer control JO1 3 runs the motor with H61 1 regardless of the actual H61 data that is the inverter internally holds the current PID command specified by the UP DOWN control and applies the held PID command at the next restart including powering on f Nowe To validate UP and DOWN terminal commands it is necessary to select the PID V Control Remote command SV J02 3 6 deu S3009 NOILONN 4 m Enable data change with keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning this terminal command OFF protects function code data from unintentionally getting changed with the keypad Only when the WE KP terminal command is ON you can change function code data with the keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below Function Disable changing of all function code data Enable changing of all function code data Disable changing of all function code data except FOO data If no WE KP terminal command is assigned the inverter interprets WE KP as being ON by default sm Tf you mistakenly assign a WE KP terminal command you no longer edit or row modify function code data In such a case temporarily turn this WE KP assigned terminal ON and reassign the WE KP terminal command to a correct command WE KP is only a signal that allows you to change function
49. alarm with Latch Absolute value Same as above with Hold and Latch alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm While PV lt SV AL or SV AH lt PV PID ALM is ON PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL 1 alarm AH 113 112 E e PID feedback PV 1 PID commard value SV 9 112 Data for J11 Deviation alarm with Hold 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Description Same as above with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch Hold Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch Same as above with Hold and Latch During the power on sequence the alarm output is kept OFF disabled even when the monitored quantity is within the alarm range Once it goes out of the alarm range and comes into the alarm range again the alarm is enabled Latch Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range To release the latch perform a reset by using the 55 key or turning the RST terminal command ON etc Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm m Upper level alarm AH J12 J12 specifies the upper limit of the alarm AH in percentage of the feedback amount m Lower level alarm AL J13 J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm AL in percentage 46 of the feedback amount 7
50. alarm er 8 If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run yo3 Timer NC RN EZ RN RR RUN yo4 Baud rate 0 2400 0 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y codes Link Functions Code Data setting range y05 Data length y06 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU yO7 Stop bits yos No response error detection time y09 Response interval y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol yl1 RS 485 Communication Option 1 to 255 Station address yl2 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm er p 1 Trip with alarm er p after running for the period specified by timer y13 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm er p If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run yia Timer moos or Es Lv v 20 yi4 Baud rate 0 2400 0 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps ALL yt5 Data length 0 8 bits 1 7 bits 6 deu nm y16 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU O 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU O y17 Stop bits Z Q y18 No response error detection time O U y
51. e Oc3 Overcurrent at constant speed eri Memory error e in Input phase loss er2 Keypad communication error u Undervoltage er3 CPU eror Op Output phase loss er4 Optional communication error e Oul Overvoltage during acceleration er5 Option error e Ou2 Overvoltage during deceleration er 6 Operation error e Ou3 Overvoltage at constant speed er7 Tuning error e Oh1 Overheating of the heat sink erg8 RS 485 communication error e Oh2 External alarm e erf Data save error due to e Oh3 Inverter overheat undervoltage Oh4 Motor protection 7 PTC thermistor option e erh Hardware error erp RS 485 communication error e dbh Overheating of braking resistor pg PG disconnection err Mock alarm Running or trip mode Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description Refer to Section 8 7 Protective Functions Environment Protection Refer to Section 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 7 g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 3 Terminal Specifications Terminal functions Main circuit and analog input terminals 8 3 1 Main circuit Functions LI R L2 S Main circuit Connect the three phase input power lines or single phase input L3 T or power inputs power lines LI L L2 N U V W Inverter outputs Connect a three phase motor P1 P DC reactor Connect a DC reactor DCR for correcting power factor c
52. inverter operation Data Setting F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function codes 6 deu enables its data to be displayed changed H codes High performance functions A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions S3009 NOILONNA o codes Optional function Data Checking Displays only function codes that have been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Drive Monitoring Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running I O Checking Displays external interface information Maintenance Information Displays maintenance information including accumulated run time Alarm Information For details of each menu item KEYPAD Displays the latest four alarm codes You can refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 function E59 defines the property of terminal C1 for either a current input 4 to 20 mA DC CI function or a voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function In addition to this setting you need to turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed
53. item No Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command This shows the rotational direction being output f forward reverse stop Rotational direction Punnine status This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to 8 Bi Displaying running status in Section 3 3 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Cumulative run time When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 No of startups to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to O and the count will start again S
54. limiter 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 Hz for frequency setting signal 0 0 to 200 0 Analog input adjustment for 12 Gain Analog input adjustment for C1 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Bias frequency 400 to 400 Hz Bias Frequency command 1 Bias frequency x 100 maximum frequency DC break Starting freq Braking level Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 to 100 0 0 s DC brake inactive 0 1 t0 30 0s DC braking 1 Braking starting requency E Braking level Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 to 100 0 00 Disable 0 1 to 30 00 s Starting frequency Freq Holding time 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 to 10 0s Starting frequency 1 Holding time 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 00 to 10 00 s Stop frequency 0 1 to 6 0 Hz Stop frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Motor sound Carrier freq Sound tone 0 75 1 to 15 kHz 0to3 Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 1 to 15 kHz loto 3 FMA and FMP terminals Select 0 Analog output FMA function 1 Pulse output FMP function Analog output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP FMA Voltage adjust Function 0 to 200 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output t
55. the enable communications link command LE assigned to one of the digital input terminals from X1 to X5 controls the switch communications link Low limiter Limits the lower value by a constant or pu data set to a function code T data set to a function code OR logic In normal logic if any input is ON then C ON Only if all inputs are OFF then C OFF Zero limiter Prevents data from dropping to a negative value NOR Not OR logic In normal logic if any input is OFF then C ON If all inputs are ON C OFF Gain multiplier for reference frequencies given by current and or voltage input or for analog output signals C AxB AND logic In normal logic only if A ON and B ON then C ON Otherwise C OFF Adder for 2 signals or values C A B If B is negative then C A B acting as a subtracter auc c a n je 4 1 NOT logic In normal logic if A ON then B OFF and vice versa 919017 1OH1NO9 HOW SWVHOVIG 2018 o 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Key operation on the keypad Load shaft speed command Line speed command Constant feeding rate time command LED monitor Reference loss detection Selection of normal inverse Switch normal inverse operation Ivs
56. the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor at the both ends of the acceleration deceleration zones like a figure of S letter Related function code H07 Slip compensation control A mode of control in which the output frequency of an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation is used as an actual output frequency to compensate for motor slippage Related function codes P09 to P12 and A23 to A26 Stall A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection or other malfunctions of the inverter Starting frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts its output not the frequency at which a motor starts rotating Related function codes F23 and A12 Starting torque Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating or the drive torque with which the motor can run a load Simultaneous keying To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad This presents the special function of inverters Stop frequency The output frequency at which an inverter stops its output Related function code F25 Thermal time constant The time needed to activate the electronic thermal overload protection after the preset operation level current continuously flows This is an adjustable function code data to meet the property of a motor that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric Related function codes F12 and A08 Torque boost If a general purpose moto
57. themselves A command assigned to the digital input is called the terminal command to control the inverter externally Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 3 1 functions Terminal Electronic thermal overload protection Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard a motor An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition based on the internal data given by function code P99 A39 about the properties of the motor and the driving conditions such as the drive current voltage and frequency External potentiometer A potentiometer optional that is used to set frequencies as well as built in one Fan stop operation A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut down if the internal temperature in the inverter is low and when no operation command is issued Related function code H06 Frequency accuracy stability The percentage of variations in output frequency to a predefined maximum frequency Frequency limiter Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control the internal drive frequency in order to keep the motor speed within the specified level between the peak and bottom frequencies Related function codes F15 F16 and H64 G 3 Glossary Frequency resolution The minimum step or increment in which output frequency is varied rather than continuously Function code Code to customize the inverter Setting function codes realizes the po
58. thermistor and PID feedback signals depending on the function code definition Related function codes F01 C30 E59 E61 to E63 and J02 Analog output An analog DC output signal of the monitored data such as the output frequency the current and voltage inside an inverter The signal drives an analog meter installed outside the inverter for indicating the current inverter running status Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 3 1 Terminal functions Automatic deceleration A control mode in which deceleration time is automatically extended up to 3 times of the commanded time to prevent the inverter from tripping due to an overvoltage caused by regenerative power even if a braking resistor is not used Related function code H69 G 1 Glossary Auto energy saving operation Energy saving operation that automatically drives the motor with lower output voltage when the motor load has been light for minimizing the product of voltage and current electric power Related function codes F37 and A13 AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator control A control that keeps an output voltage constant regardless of variations of the input source voltage or load Base frequency Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency Output 0 4 frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter delivers a constant voltage in the output V f pattern Related function codes F04 and
59. y O O a O d o z O T y m Z e S Figure 1 10 B A removable interface board is used The interface board is used as a terminal block for control signals Since it is removable wiring operations are simple i IT Figure 1 11 All types and variations of interface board are available as options available soon Optional interface boards have the same dimensions as the standard interface board supplied with the inverter so it is possible to meet optional specifications using the same installation space as with standard specification models B A multi function keypad which enables a wide variety of operations is available A multi function keypad is available as an option This keypad features a large 7 segment LED with five digits and large backlit liquid crystal panel Its view ability is high and guidance is displayed on the liquid crystal panel therefore operations can be conducted simply A copy function is included LITT O O Figure 1 12 B Inverter support loader software is available On sale soon Windows compatible loader software is available to simplify the setting and management of function codes RS 485 communication RJ 45 connector Personal computer USB RS 485 converter made by System E Sacom Sales E Corp d p ad uem iR i cea w USB cable that comes With summum the converter Figure 1 13 B Simulated failure enables peripheral device operation c
60. 0 25 1 2 70 16 05 0 90 400 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 05 Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load OR aX Rated slip frequency applied current current A uen A A 76 76 Hz P02 A16 Ew P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 50 12 61 13 63 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 20 0 78 10 20 14 91 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 18 8 67 10 66 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 6 55 11 26 2 00 2 20 to 3 60 2 2 4 60 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 50 5 79 11 22 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 0 5 09 13 66 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 14 5 4 50 14 70 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 0 3 78 15 12 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 5 3 24 16 37 18 50 to 21 99 34 0 2 90 17 00 22 00 to 30 00 39 0 2 70 16 05 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m When HP rating motors P99 1 or A39 1 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables HP stands for horsepower which is a unit for motor power mainly used in US 200 V class series Motor capacity Nominal E OU 22 X setuency HER po A id i Hz P02 A16 HP P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 11 1 10 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 1 40 1 12 11 02 13
61. 00 Load Selection Variable torque load Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC Depending on the inverter capacity 100 of the motor rated DEA These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 9 13 9 1 Function Code Tables A code continued Default Refer to Code Data setting range setting page A14 Control Mode Selection 2 V f operation with slip compensation inactive 9 102 Dynamic torque vector operation V f operation with slip compensation active V f operation with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector operation with optional PG interface A15 No of poles A16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 capacity of motor A17 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 5 Rated value of Fuji standard A18 Auto tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune
62. 1 Function Code Tables Bi Function codes requiring simultaneous keying To modify the data for function code F00 Data Protection H03 Data Initialization H45 Mock Alarm or H97 Clear Alarm Data simultaneous keying is needed involving the E keys or E keys B Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Some function code data can be changed while the inverter is running whereas others cannot Further depending on the function code modifications may or may not validate immediately For details refer to the Change when running column in Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables For details of function codes refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VHd3dO Figure 3 4 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Tip Power ON amp Programming mode D Menu List of function codes Function code data Menu 0 E Quick Setup em P n ERE A Q da i a n Lo 3 Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Once you have added
63. 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Command sources specified by y98 Data for y98 Frequency command Follow H30 data Run command Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Via field bus option Combination of command sources Run command source Frequency command Inverter itself Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option til H30 20 H30z1 H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 y98 0 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 Via RS 485 H30 22 H30 23 H30z5 H30 2 3 or 5 communications y98 20 y98 20 y98 0 y98 1 link standard Via RS 485 H30 6 H30 7 H30 8 H30 6 7 or 8 communications y98 20 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 link option card Via field bus H30 0 2 or 6 H30 1 3 or 7 H30 4 5 or 8 H30 0 1 to 8 option y98 2 y98 2 y98 2 y98 3 LL For details refer to Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication Users Manual MEHA48b or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual When an LE terminal command Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus is assigned to a digital input terminal turning LE ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 effective When LE is OFF those settings are ineffective so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control H42 displays the
64. Bit 1 BitO Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 BitO 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 0 1 6 0 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 0 7 0 0 1 1 1 23 1 0 1 1 1 8 0 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 1 0 26 1 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 1 27 1 1 0 1 1 12 0 1 1 0 0 28 1 1 1 0 0 13 0 1 1 0 1 29 1 1 1 0 1 14 0 1 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 1 0 15 0 1 1 1 1 31 1 1 1 1 1 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA 9 101 Ko 2 6 A codes Motor 2 parameters Maximum Frequency 2 F03 Maximum Frequency 1 Base Frequency 2 F04 Base Frequency 1 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Maximum Output Voltage 2 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 Torque Boost 2 F09 Torque Boost 1 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Select motor characteristics F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics A07 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Overload detection level F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level A08 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Thermal time constant F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for driving DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency F20 DC Braking 1 Braking starting freque
65. C 3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage C 4 Regarding existing equipment 1 Incase of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0 01346 under the surge voltage condition of over 1 100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning the inverter Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage after a lapse of several months of commissioning 2 In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C 3 App D Inverter Generating Loss The table below lists the inverter generating loss Generating loss W Power supply pound a i applied motor Inverter type Low carrier High carrier voltage kW frequency frequency 2 kHz 15 kHz 0 1 FRNO 1E1S 20 16 18 0 2 FRNO 2E1S 20 23 27 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 20 35 39 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 200 54 58 1 5 FRN1 5E1S 200 74 95 2o 22 FRN2 2E18 20 98 128 3 7 FRN3 7E1S 20 166 231 5 5 FRNS 5E1S 20 179 232 75 FRN7 5E1S 200 287 364 11 FRNIIEIS 2LI 444 545 15 FRNISE1S 20 527 700 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 40 30 52 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 40 40 72 1 5 FRN1 5E1S 40 57 104 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 40 79 147 Three phase 3 7 FRN3 7E1S 40 21 219 400 V 4
66. C17 Multi frequency 13 ON ON ON OFF C18 Multi frequency 14 ON ON ON ON C19 Multi frequency 15 m Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RTI command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by default Input jus command Acceleration deceleration time Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Turning HLD ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect m Coastto a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation
67. Delay Time for FAH2 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2 The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the Frequency arrival signal FAR comes ON After the delay time specified by E29 the Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 comes ON For the FAR and FAR2 refer to the descriptions of E20 E21 and E27 For details about the operation timings refer to the graph below Frequency corimand Change the Requena corn mend Reference frequency 1 E30 Reference frequency 7 e oo s Referance trequency 11 E30 Referance frequency Z E30 en mmn Reference frequency 2 Output frequancy Riaterencae Trequency 2 E30 een EL I i i i i i ju Tt I L i i i I i Frequency arial signal FAR ON ON Frequency aval i 1 Frequancy 1 delay ima EZI arrival dol PAE time E29 1 Frequency amal signal 2 FART Frequency Detection Hysteresis width for FDT When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 the FDT signal comes ON when it drops below the Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified by E32 it goes OFF You need to assign the Frequency detected output signal FDT function code data 2 to one of digital output terminals Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Output frequency Reference frequency de
68. E63 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command entered through terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command ACKI me Frequency Command ey nido pul Radarenca Loss Dalocindo 1 REF OFF i ON Prosel Frequency Command 1x inbena Frequency tho Comma ard In the diagram above f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command Note Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command The 7 abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the Reference loss detected signal REF OFF to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at
69. Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON g deyo Switches the output mode of the output terminal FM between analog voltage and pulse output When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 SW6 Data for F29 Analog voltage output FMA 0 Factory default SNOI VOIJIO3dS Pulse output FMP Switches property of the input terminal C1 for C1 V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code E59 and H26 Data Data SW SWS for E59 for H26 Analog frequency setting in current Factory default CI OFF Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF PTC thermistor input Cl ON Figure 8 10 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example default SRE Se FMAFMPICI V2 O 30A 308 ac Factory default O Figure 8 10 Location of the Slide Switches 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications 8 3 2 1 Main circuit terminals The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ accordi
70. H09 For restart after momentary power failure F14 4 or 5 For normal startup 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Enable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Auto search delay time H49 Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately coast to stop it and perform auto search every switching H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing control The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied Errar fallura Recowany y V DG link bus 1 voltage Matar spaex Output fraguency Culpa frequency si fuae C Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for th
71. ID number in each function code group Function code group Table 3 9 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Multi Function Codes F00 to F51 Function Fundamental functions Description Functions concerning basic motor running E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal functions Functions concerning the assignment of control circuit terminals Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency settings P codes PO to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor H codes H03 to H98 High performance functions Highly added value functions Functions for sophisticated control A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor J codes JO1 to J86 Application functions Functions for applications such as PID control y codes y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication o codes 027 to 059 Optional functions Functions for options Note Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 9 Section 9
72. Indication 8 2 Common Specifications Item Explanations Running stopping Speed monitor output current A output voltage V torque calculation value input power kW PID command PID feedback amount PID output load factor motor output period for timer operation s Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Reference frequency Hz Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Hz Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Hz Motor speed set value r min Motor speed r min Load shaft speed set value r min Load shaft speed r min Line speed set value m min Line speed m min Constant feeding rate time set value min Constant feeding rate time running min Remarks Life early warning The life early warning of the main circuit capacitors capacitors on the PC boards and the cooling fan can be displayed An external output is issued in a transistor output signal Cumulative run time Shows the cumulative running hours of the motor and inverter I O check Displays the input output signal status of the inverter Power monitor Displays input power momentary accumulated power electricity cost accumulated power x displayed coefficient Trip error code Displays the cause of trip by codes 0 1 Motor 1 overload e OCI Overcurrent during acceleration 0 2 Motor 2 overload e Oc2 Overcurrent during deceleration 0 4 Inverter overload
73. Mode selection This is a link switching function for FRENIC Loader Rewriting the data of y99 to enable RS 485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the frequency and or run commands Since the data to be set in the function code of the inverter is automatically set by Loader no keypad operation is required While Loader is selected as the source of the run command if the PC runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from Loader disconnect the RS 485 communications cable from the standard port Keypad connect a keypad instead and reset the y99 to 0 This setting 0 in y99 means that the run and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes place Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99 When power is turned off the data in y99 is lost y99 is reset to 0 Function Data for y99 Frequency command Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 communications link FRENIC Loader S01 and S05 Folow HoUand yeaa Via RS 485 communications link Follow H30 and y98 data FRENIC Loader S06 Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link FRENIC Loader S01 and S05 FRENIC Loader S06 9 123 6 deyo S3009 NOILONN 4 App A A 1 A 2 A 3 App B B 1 B 2 App C C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 App D App E App F App G Gl G2 G3 Appendices Contents Advantageous Use of Inverters
74. N In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit a f u jz LE Output phase loss protection Op Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 0p Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice Mote Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the reference level in advance Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the lif
75. Option Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 Via RS 485 communications link Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting a keypad standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Via field bus option Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP Command sources specified by H30 Mode selection Data for H30 Frequency command Inverter itself F01 C30 Run command Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications link standard Inverter itself F02 Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link option card
76. P TO signals on the control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals circuit terminals Refer to BB Displaying control VO signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to Bl Displaying control I O signal terminals and BI Displaying control VO signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communications control Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal Cl in milliamperes mA Output voltage to analog Shows the output voltage on terminal FM in volts meters FM V Pulse rate of FM Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FM in pulses per second p s Input voltage on terminal C1 Shows the input voltage on terminal C1 V2 function assigned in volts V Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals 1 0 on the optional DI O interface card Refer to BM Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DUO interface card on page 3 25 for details PG pulse rate 1 Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s in quad A B phase frequency when the PG interface is installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000
77. Reference frequency Maximum frequency FO3 A01 Frequency limiter High F15 Frequency limiter Low F16 Reference frequency H63 0 Reference frequency A Maximum frequency FO3 A01 Frequency limiter High F15 Frequency limiter Low F16 Reference frequency 0 100 9 2 Overview of Function Codes When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 accordingly Nate Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 F16 F15 F23 A12 and F15 F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally Bias Frequency command 1 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 Bias base point Gain and Gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 Analog input Terminal 12 Gain Bias Function code C32 Gain Data setting range 96 0 00 to 200 00 C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Terminal C1 C1 function C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 C39 Gai
78. Several special function codes also work with execution priority each other depending on their functions or data settings This chapter explains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter You are requested to fully understand the inverter s control logic together with the function codes in order to set the function code data correctly The block diagrams contained in this chapter show only function codes having mutual relationship For the function codes that work independently and for detailed explanation of each function code refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 4 1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings Table 4 1 lists symbols commonly used in block diagrams and their meanings with some examples Table 4 1 Symbols and Meanings Symbol Meaning FW Digital inputs outputs FWD Y1 to from the inverter s control etc D circuit terminal block Symbol Meaning Function code Terminal commands assigned to digital inputs outputs FWD REV etc Low pass filter Features appropriate characteristics by changing the time constant through the function code data HEHE Switch controlled by a function code Numbers assigned to the terminals express the function code data Internal control signal for inverter logic Drive frequency command High limiter Limits the upper value by a constant or Switch controlled by a terminal command In the example shown on the left
79. Single phase 200 V 200 mA Values listed above were obtained using Fuji ELCB EG or SG series applied to the test setup The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor 4 poles 50 Hz and 200 V three phase The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 200 V class A connection and the neutral point grounding for 400 V class Y connection power lines Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires are used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter and motors 6 11 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOQ3 T3S 2 Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightning and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL 323 Figure 6 3 shows its external dimensions and a connection example Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co
80. The value displayed is the ratio of the upper lower limit to the full scale 10 V Note or 20 mA of the feedback amount in the case of a gain of 100 Upper level alarm AH and lower level alarm AL also apply to the following alarms Upper limit absolute Description ON when AH PV How to handle the alarm Lower limit absolute ON when PV AL Select alarm output J11 Absolute value alarm Parameter setting J13 AL 0 J12 AH 100 Upper limit deviation ON when SV AH lt PV Lower limit deviation ON when PV lt SV AL Upper lower limit deviation ON when ISV PVI gt AL Deviation alarm J13 AL 100 J12 AH 100 J13 AL J12 AH Upper lower range limit deviation ON when SV AL lt PV lt SV AL Deviation alarm DO inversed Upper lower range limit absolute ON when AL lt PV lt AH Absolute value alarm DO inversed Upper lower range limit deviation ON when SV AL PV SV AH 9 113 Deviation alarm DO inversed 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA 18 J19 J56 J57 J58 J59 J60 J61 PID Control Upper limit of PID process output PID Control Lower limit of PID process output The upper and lower limiter can be specified to the PID output exclusively used for PID control The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and
81. Voltage input to terminal 12 Analog Input adjustment for 12 Polarity Unipolar 2 Current input Terminal C1 Frequency command 1 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 3 Voltage and current input Frequency command 1 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function 4 Reversible operation with polarity Terminal 12 Frequency command 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 Analog Input adjustment for 12 Polarity Bipolar 5 Inverse mode operation with polarity Terminal 12 Frequency command 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 Selection of normal inverse operation Inverse operation 6 Inverse mode operation Terminal C1 Frequency command 1 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function Selection of normal inverse operation Inverse operation 7 UP DOWN control 1 Frequency command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control UP DOWN control Initial frequency setting 0 00 8 UP DOWN control 2 Frequency command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control UP DOWN control Initial frequency setting Last UP DOWM command value on releasing run command Operation method 0 Keypad operation Motor rotational direction specified by terminals FWD REV 1 External signal input digital input 2 Keypad operation Run to forward 3 Keypad op
82. above Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Automatic Deceleration Disable Vode selection Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enable Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by F08 E11 0 01 to 100 0 999 Disable Default Refer to setting page 9 37 9 96 9 97 Deceleration Characteristics 0 Disable 9 98 1 Enable Torque Limiter Frequency increment 0 0 to 400 0 limit for braking Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Gain for Motor 1 9 97 9 98 9 98 DC Braking 0 Slow 9 32 Braking response mode 1 Quick 9 98 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function Data STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable TIL Clear Alarm Data 0 Does not clear alarm data 9 95 1 Clear alarm data and return to zero 9 99 Protection Maintenance Function 0 to 31 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in decimal format In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled Vode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Bit 3 Select li
83. according to the Building Scale Contract demand Correction BET coefficient kW coefficient p Note If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B 7 calculate the value by interpolation Note The correction coefficient B is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the customer and electric power company for the customers receiving the electric power over 2000 kW or from the special high voltage lines 4 Degree of harmonics to be calculated The higher the degree of harmonics the lower the current flows This is the property of harmonics generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by The case not causing a special hazard of the term 3 in the above Appendix for the 9th or higher degrees of the harmonics Therefore It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated 3 Examples of calculation 1 Equivalent capacity Example of loads pur ey ene Conversion factor Equivalent capacity No of inverters Example 1 400 V 3 7 kW 10 units 4 61 KVA x 10 units K32 1 4 4 61 x 10 x 1 4 w AC reactor and DC reactor 64 54 kVA Example 2 400 V 1 5 kW 15 units 2 93 KVA x 15 units K34 1 8 2 93 x 15 x 1 8 w AC reactor 79 11 kVA Refer to Table Refer to Table B 2 B 3 2 Harmonic current every degrees Example 1 400 V 3 7 kW 10 units w AC reactor and maximum availability 0 55 Fundamental current onto 6 6 kV lines mA
84. and braking and also the response to the slip compensation as a response time to the slip compensation P10 The voltage calculator determines the output voltage of the inverter The calculator adjusts the output voltage to control the motor output torque If the DC braking control is enabled the logic switches the voltage and frequency control components to the ones determined by the DC braking block to feed the proper DC current to the motor for the DC braking 4 11 919017 1OH1NOO HOS SWVHOVIG 2018 Marito 4 5 PID Process Control Block LED monitor speed monitor tem Keypad operation Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed 4 Command O 2 O Line speed command Frequency command 1 Constant feeding Slo rate time comma d a LI 12 12 gt C gt ZTN ie Hardware Ci PTCthemistor i l 31 Gain Bias qt hiuc Messen ad SOON E Swr c Cirio Mxbssecio rior Cie O limiter Flo W C1 L x lo c1 O O O A T2 TN sl Hardware Ct PTC themistor 8 A 5 i 3 i Gain Bias switch Ct function Mode selection C1 C function o 5l SW7 V2 Eso Hee 0 C1 C
85. and insert a 1 uF capacitor between the input terminal of the inverter and ground Ro LEM 1 As a temporary measure Insert a 0 1 uF capacitor between the O V terminal of the power supply circuit in the detection unit of the overhead photoelectric relay and a frame of the overhead panel Frame cl air par pami 2 As a permanent measure move the 24 V power supply from the ground to the overhead unit so that signals are sent to the ground side with relay contacts in the ceiling part 1 The effect of the inductive filter and LC filter may not be expected because of sound frequency component 2 In the case of a V connection power supply transformer in a 200V system it is necessary to connect capacitors as shown in the following figure because of different potentials to 1 The wiring is separated by more than 30 cm 2 When separation is impossible signals can be received and sent with dry contacts etc 3 Do not wire low current signal lines and power lines in parallel device Prox imity switch capaci tance type Table A 2 Continued Phenomena A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter was operated a O T Distance of 4E re lacius LE Phoiorlecikic anig rey pani lt Possible cause gt Although the inverter and photoelectric relay are separated by a sufficient distance but the power supplies share a common connection it is cons
86. anus asc can bs CA s orca id a secius LLL EAE LII REL LL ey eae mr p mhir den en rmm er o IT d amo pee ss a d bn coerced jo Pa pane tac gh pidan mi fiu durs accede Jom connait ha cuu nda 4 E in iui HEAD AA AAA ERC implant Hor EFL Th a a ms Mier Lue E comp wih Durgpaan Ada con im ries El Casas repito For edidi miis reci im accords i inis Du omaes Lai Pra fitter RMFLLLL L Tr s Esas dar bir aris l or Heap pateh purposar an Pra EMC lt omplasi Pla described aber foi E cea ai compe adiu EEUC Ciechan Duair circuit nier OF_ OO0 O This rr la cara de ha suit circus iom cam pe queries cava kepa Gb Ar ei ree E OS dores brian of rior rm m AEE ied CTO A ae ia wa Frisch sciet inii c erri miah Td FS iine rn mico y media pr whan ihora i kriy Ci serm a uppEEEE raros noe ond induction mom Momo Eds airg fie wang leor a paai sio is long is salices dri a Gree her reside los Pob referia ra lr o Da RLAR DL dd Hd A O n n Hr ld lori cts c o AA heparina T apar nepr eaten fa bad OFLC LA a goes Pan Ine reta manent ai This ew CA CM Che uen Gul DELL Far Fas ricum x npo ro Sao Becton dg rotor dern vez Pree Zaruxga iz molar ios duae Ip mrpe obj in KE 1 rigen meris Urania Suppresxes rogis nose aw daci n Fass Pe el das eg W bs aer ler oram pari sic oin kr 8 in mici xz B rixa reriucion raartarresasuw hep Bhim iy und rial os cara hear Aun rompa bur CS DECRE CS menia o
87. are detailed in the description of the function code having the youngest identifying number Those related function codes are indicated in the right end of the title bar 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the keys Data for F00 Function Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the Cz Keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the keys But you cannot change function code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the 1 LU keys Enabling the protection disables the keys to change function code data To change FOO data simultaneous keying of E from 0 to 1 or E 4 from 1 to 0 keys is required Tip Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link
88. arrival hysteresis width E30 and then the frequency arrival delay time E29 has elapsed Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 E Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting output current limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload stop hit mechanical stop it automatically activates the stall free facility and shifts the output frequency When such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more this output signal comes ON This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the monitor m Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting is in progress The auto resetting is specified by H04 and H05 Auto reset Refer to the descriptions of H04 and H05 for details about the number of resetting times and reset interval m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip OAZ actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip 0 11 temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip 0 1 temperature minus 8 C 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Service life al
89. basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 3 1 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Power ON it Running mode SS Programming mode Pac List of function codes Function code data ALTO 2 ED T 5 Z ENT le 4 F e i the QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILWYAdO0 Cot ou i d Save data and go to the next function code cuan rcu I 1 I Go to the next I I Gb function code c m QD db Go to the next function code X 3 Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Changing F01 F05 and E52 data only Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 3 1 fn To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code MIE ES2to Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode For d
90. before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration 4LT Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the amp Note A a A base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters PO1 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics A06 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level A07 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2
91. being set to any of 3 to 31 Refer to the FVR E11S s F09 DEC mode Normal Coast to stop Deceleration mode 0 Normal deceleration 1 Coast to stop Instantaneous overcurrent limiting 0 1 0 Inactive 1 Active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting 0 Disable 1 Enable Auto restart Restart time Freq fall rate 0 1to5 0s 0 00 to 100 0 Hz s Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time Frequency fall rate 0 1to5 0s when H16 999 0 00 to 100 0 Hz s PID control Mode select Feedback signal Feedback filter 0 Inactive 1 Active 2 Active inverse operation mode PID control Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation Termina 12 0 to 10 VDC Terminal 12 extended function 5 PID feedback amount Terminal C1 4 to 20 mA Terminal C1 extended function C1 function 5 PID feedback amount 2 Termina 12 10 to 0 VDC 3 Terminal C1 20 to 4 mA 0 01 to 10 00 1 to 100096 P Gain 0 000 to 10 000 0 0 Inactive 0 1 to 3600 s Integral time 0 0 Disable 0 1 to 3600 0 s 0 00 Inactive 0 01 to 10 0 s D Differential time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 10 00 s 0 0 to 60 0 s Feedback filter 0 0 to 60 0 s PTC thermistor Mode select 0
92. below Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position Current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function Cl Voltage input O to 10 VDC V2 function V2 Note To use terminal C1 for the PTC thermistor input set E59 data to 0 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function E61 E62 and E63 define the property of terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources eee is i Function Description 0 None This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be Auxiliary frequency added to frequency command 1 F01 It is never command 1 added to frequency command 2 multi frequency command or other frequency commands This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be Auxiliary frequency added to all frequency commands including command 2 frequency command 1 frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured This input includes the feedback of the FID eedbar k anoni temperature or pressure under the PID control F Mote If these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is Pr given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt
93. blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed EPs a Decimal point Table 3 2 PID Process Command Manually Set with Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote command LED Monitor selection SV E43 JO1 J02 Multi frequency With 4 ez key S84 SS8 0 PID process command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently Other than 0 selected 3 5 Setting up the frequency command with and keys under PID process control When function code F01 is set to 0 7 keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the keys In Programming or Alarm mode the keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 3 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command iz The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 3 Manual Speed Frequency Command Specified with Keys and Requirements PID Communi control LED Frequency Multi Multi
94. braking resistor capacity 150 Braking power a Braking tima Ts Braking time Th Time Cyclic period To Figure 7 11 Duty Cycle deyo SalLIiOVdVO YILEJANI ANY HOLOMN IVINILAO ONILO3T3S Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Contents 8 1 Standard Models tenth datu uet ete e al Dee rp pente e RE ele edet des 8 1 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V clasS Setles ee ect ette tede qe A it 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series sssssssssessesseeee eene enne nennen eren nennen rennen nennen 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class Series e oreet ei S D E TRA du eee de ei es 8 3 82 Common Specifications oiii IHRER IH adalat endian IN Te DAR EUR IET DR IU RE Dee RUPEE UNS 8 4 8 33 Terminal Specifications iste ete tee ea eiie esee ete e OE e pedes 8 8 83 I Terminal functons 2 dt dect e De a een dt o a 8 8 8 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications ssesesesessseesesstseessesesseseeseeseesessreressesees 8 19 83 2 1 Mam eircuit terminals sene e d dece Re wate ha it e RO HER e un 8 19 8 3 22 Contr
95. capacity P02 A16 Rated current P03 A17 Auto tuning P04 A18 Online tuning POS A19 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 96X P08 A22 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 A23 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Motor Selection P99 A39 Slip Compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45 Startup Times of Motor H44 A46 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes before use Functions Restrictions Related function codes Non linear V f pattern Disabled Linear V f pattern only H50 to H53 Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not F24 supported Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not F39 supported Overload early warning Disabled E34 and E35 Droop control Disabled H28 UP DOWN control Disabled Fixed at default setting 0 H61 PID control Disabled JO1 Braking signal Disabled J68 to J72 Software current limiter Disabled F43 and F44 Rotation direction limitation Disabled H08 Overload stop Disabled J63 to J67 Noe To run motor 2 with the M2 MI terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the M2 MI should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of
96. code H30 Constant feeding rate time Time required for an object to move in a constant distance previously defined The faster speed the shorter time and vise versa This facility may be applied to a chemical process that determines a processing time of materials as the speed such as heating cooling drying or infiltration in some constant speed machinery Related function codes E39 and E50 Constant output load A constant output load is characterized by 1 The required torque is in inverse proportion to the load shaft speed 2 An essentially constant power requirement Related function code F37 and A13 Applications Machine tool spindles Required torque N m o0 T 28 9 EN z g Required power kW c Y 0 Rotating speed of load machine Constant torque load A constant torque load is characterized by 1 A requirement for an essentially constant torque regardless of the load shaft speed 2 A power requirement that proportion to the load shaft speed Related function code F37 and A13 Applications Conveyors elevators and carrier machines decreases in Required torque Nem 0 35 a 22 ud ooo Et gp 25 355 Pid c 3 a EE oot Required power kW Rotating speed of load machine Control circuit terminals Terminals on the inverter which are used for input output of signals to control or manage the inverter external equipment directly or indirectly Current limiter
97. current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm O u With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 B Motor sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 KHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor i Non If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor 9 34 9 2 Overview of Function Codes These function codes allow terminal FM to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse pulse duty approximately 50 The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable B Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FM You need to set switch SW6 on the interface printed circuit board PCB Refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Position of slide switch SW6 mounted on the in
98. deviation Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action An increase in gain speeds up response but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output A decrease in gain delays response but it stabilizes the inverter output A Deviation i Time ko MV Time 9 108 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m integral time J04 J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s 0 0 means that the integral component is ineffective I Integral action An operation that the change rate of an MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action which outputs the manipulated value that integrates the deviation Therefore I action is effective in bringing the feedback amount close to the commanded value For the system whose deviation rapidly changes however this action cannot make it react quickly The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter that is JO4 data The longer the integral time the slower the response The reaction to the external disturbance also becomes slow The shorter the integral time the faster the response Setting too short integral time however makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against the external disturbance Deviation P REESE M 1 Time b os I I MV l l Time m Differential time J05
99. driving the load where g is the gravity acceleration 9 8 m s Then the driving torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows 60 0 W W geu 2 Te Nu No N m 7 4 Tm ma Sal LIOVdVO H3 LHJANI ANY HOLON TWAWILdO ONILO3 T3S Load Camer table Wo kg Recduction gedr Mia rimini Ball screw Figure 7 7 Moving a Load Horizontally 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation When an object whose moment of inertia is J kg m rotates at the speed N r min it has the following kinetic energy J 2neN E 2 J 7 5 p 60 D 7 5 To accelerate the above rotational object the kinetic energy will be increased to decelerate the object the kinetic energy must be discharged The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be expressed as follows Nu 7 6 This way the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and deceleration First calculation method of moment of inertia 1s described then those for acceleration and deceleration time are explained T 1 Calculation of moment of inertia For an object that rotates around the shaft virtually divide the object into small segments and square the distance from the shaft to each segment Then sum the squares of the distances and the masses of the segments to calculate the moment of inertia J Wier kg m 7 7 The following describes equations to cal
100. eed eret geriet 7 13 1 2 2 Notes on selection 5 a npe no d bea abe cil 7 13 Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS S L Standard Models ool EUR eu een tue 8 1 8 I Three phase 200 V cl ss SerieS aide ettet dep e ie t e ne 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series esee conca conc nero cnn enne teen nennen nennen 8 2 8 E3 Smgle ph se 200 V class Series ase eoe eae RO aet b bates bre ig Sat 8 3 8 2 Common SpecifiCations 6 io E rcd t a ae 8 4 83 Terminal Sp cifications 5 oo ad 8 8 8 3 1 Terminal function reo eet titi 8 8 8 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications esee 8 19 8 32 1 Main circuit terminals uitam EP RERO E epp 8 19 8 32 2 Control circuit terminals iude parete ede res eter EER i 8 20 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment eese eene nennen 8 21 84 1 Oper ting environment ono ee etel dee tbe eene De ete eie ee based bh 8 21 8 4 2 Storage en vITOBIDeDlU o oet e etti o 8 22 8 4 2 1 Temporary storage et echo Re or eR nas ect ie eee 8 22 8 4 2 2 Cong termi storage soe do acest capes og noa tc int Redde ete 8 22 8 5 External Dimensions ne Ete een teo RD HE RE Tet pibas 8 23 85 1 Standard models hoe aee ea e it e te oes ir e a 8 23 8 5 2 Standard keypad e bc e bep am o et re BR 8 26 8 6 Connection Diagrams eo IRR TRUE teri EO peri ie RE biopsy 8 27 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad 0 0
101. ener enne e a trennen 6 2 6 231 Recommended wires eoe Ra 6 4 63 gt Peripheral Equipment 5n eee ene eei dee 6 8 64 Selecting Options ceci en eee eee erem P tree e prete ec De hbri eu feine 6 14 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment options sese a e enne ne e te ene teen nenne trennen enne 6 14 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications sese nee enne nne tenn ne ennnnr enne enne 6 23 64 3 Meter OpUOTS iod eei tte t deme te te te emt n dii eee 6 26 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters oooonncnncnocnocnnnnononnonnnnnonnnnnonnnnonocnn nono enne enne nennen e innere nnne enn ee oats 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics eene enne nnne enne eene nennen 7 1 T2 S l ction procedure eco Hed a a 7 4 1 123 Equations for selections iter tid quest pt t ciere e dani 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 0 0 eee eeeeceeeeeceseeecesecseesecuerseceaeeeesaecaeeseenereenaenees 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation esee eene 7 8 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor eese enne 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor ooooconccnonoccnonconcnnnnnnoncnncnn cono nononnonnrnncn eene nennen 7 12 72 Selecting Braking Resiste EREG DEGERE REPREHENE 7 13 7 2 1 Selection procedure s s iia o ret e bent m
102. factor will switch the inverter to Running mode In Programming mode In Alarm mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with and keys Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor In Programming mode a In Alarm mode RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor oe oy 1 and 54 UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor LED Indicators RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active KEYPAD CONTROL LED Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights Unit and mode expression by the three LED indicators The three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit kW A Hz r min and m min Refer to Chapter 3 Sectio
103. feedback amount is displayed EP a Decimal point Table 3 4 PID Command Manually Set with Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote command LED monitor selection SV E43 JO1 J02 Multi frequency With Ii key SS4 SS8 0 PID command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF Other than 0 PID command currently selected 3 7 Setting up the primary frequency command with and keys under PID dancer control When function code F01 is set to 0 7 keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a primary frequency command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the 1 keys In Programming or Alarm mode the keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary frequency command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command iz The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Primary Frequency Command Specified with l Keys and Requirements PID Communi control LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency link selection E43 F01 SS2 SSI operation JO
104. frequency setting esee eene 6 23 2 Mult f ncton keypad 5 hanno eaa eno RU edat eR ela 6 24 3 Extension cable for remote operation ssssssesseseeeeereeerenne enne nre 6 24 4 RS 485 communications Card ccccccssccessceessecessceesseceeeceessecseeeeeseeceeeeesseceeeeeeseecseseeessecseeeesaeenes 6 25 5 Inverter support loader software eee nennen aney iee 6 25 64 37 Meter opt eiii liado e A A eR ed aan e Nava PA e eret 6 26 E Erequency meters i o RO n ene tete proe ete rite re re bte teri t 6 26 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Multi 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Multi This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference Refer to Figure 6 1 for a quick overview of available options Exiemaion patie tor reise operada Anolis bape Handiari juicer ire back or ecko saith hae A A nda PITT Pis c lido ruin dl cun 5a portioned A A re ii WMiulldunzsion kerypmj raid aun aa TPaz1 This reuiri Aerbon keypad Fs inge igi Te Sagres LED wi barii LCD IH cineri be muris zu a iecur bey rmator EMS Liebe Po Bl grati Game cr in bon fen pisam supe lo prelati al Fus vere Hal de sonmeciad lo ios por pt Fanda by Fig Dacic Tadia Ca Lid Radio rosa reducing eo phe necio ALG ALL Tap A nan Pod Pg md pis ori fess cn Tack gon in Pag er c3 und d VA or gun Gece a inc band
105. gt 11 0 D 04 os 17 10 og ozs 85 17 17 099 10 08 D 14 18 D Three 18 phase 37 40 73 f 130 86 21 es Qg tt 29 78 89 21 m 400V 5 5 3 2 O 130 143 210 23 0 3 1 208 327 256 Q33 45 e 57 o 10 11 0 61 m L o2 20 33 20 900 Jj 18 19 0 66 D shae 0 82 T 200V 14 m 14 rs 17 gt m o Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model The input route mean c square RMS current is calculated according to the following conditions 2 m Power supply capacity 500 kVA power supply impedance 5 Z The current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage such as 230 VAC and 380 VAC The braking current is always constant independent of braking resistor specifications including built in standard and 10 ED models 6 2 1 Recommended wires Tables 6 2 and 6 3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power control panel W f the internal temperature of your power control panel is 50 C or below Table 6 2 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size mm Power Main circuit power X L1 R L2 S L3 T or L1 L L2 N supply Petar Inverter type voltage kW Allowable temp 1 am Allowable temp 1 S Allowable temp 1 Current 20 08 Lr pmexman 20 pis peque pes puo pi pur pes p 28 pi 15 Nominal Inverter out
106. im come aber m rior casae dk correcta mm m cad on io sarta harmkrrur cra n rin lo dd bal mil i m BP im ee d m recen lo ceed an RI tor en fea eter a A O E E EA O IA RII HM used bk gipsss Mo d Da A ad tH mg i com nues bey ag nid Going dl ha phase mdvanceog cawcir in tha Friars Bower PEHY 8 Lied wer Fei nid oiii a oi u or ames in ihe pras apple vole r irem leoi Ceres hecha mcn Fabio nlii od a up urne coer en impero pr Wi Dormema minke e prc em s Pr ami rm nn aae Panal nepunt adacior ora bee soon MA B TOO Tres acheter cule B ril dir iii nri cid renim rocas reacio bp Pup Teie This m ur misgi For miening he iria x conii fan ic iba cid ol ius orini parel 9 deyo 1N3 NdINO3 1VeaHdl dd ONILOATAS 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial power lines motor or any of the optional peripheral equipment The level of electric noise issued from the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and routing To solve such noise related problems refer to Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Select wires that satisfy the following requirements Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current allowable current capacity Protective coordination with an MCCB or ELCB with overcurrent protection in the overcurrent zone Voltage
107. inverter or if the ambient temperature abnormally rises then the inverter becomes overloaded so that it reduces the motor speed to lessen the load for continuing operation hverisr imperatum Tipul Tequancy Z y O O am Oo d o z O T y m lt F Figure 1 19 Fully compatible with network operation B RS 485 communications connector is standard A connector RJ 45 compatible with RS 485 communication is provided as standard 1 port also used for keypad communication so the inverter can be connected easily using an off the shelf LAN cable IOBASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 connector Figure 1 20 B Complies with optional networks using option cards Available soon Installation of special interface cards option makes it possible to connect to the following networks DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP CC Link B Wiring is easy with the RS 485 communications card optional The RS 485 communications card is available as an option It has a pair of RJ 45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration independently of the communications port RJ 45 provided as standard on the inverter Important points 1 A pair of RJ 45 connectors eliminating the provision of a separate multidrop adaptor 2 Built in terminating resistor eliminating the provision of a separate terminating resistor Figure 1 21 RS 485 Communications Card option Example of configuration with pe
108. limiting function 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm O J and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Function code data 21 This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency
109. loss due to the wire length is within the allowable range Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used Recommended wires are listed below Use these wires unless otherwise specified E 600 V class of vinyl insulated wires IV wires Use this class of wire for the power circuits This class of wire is hard to twist so using it for the control signal circuits is not recommended Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60 C E 600 V grade heat resistant PVC insulated wires or 600 V polyethylene insulated wires HIV wires As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a higher ambient temperature 75 C they can be used for both of the main power and control signal circuits To use this class of wire for the control circuits you need to correctly twist the wires and keep the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible E 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits These wires are smaller in diameter and more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires meaning that these wires can be used to save on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system even in high temperature environments The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires is 90 C The Boardlex wire range available from Furukawa Electric Co Ltd satisfies t
110. machinery related to nuclear power control aerospace uses medical uses or transportation When the product is to be used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail ensure that appropriate safety devices and or equipment are installed B Precautions for Use In running general purpose motors Driving a 400 V general purpose motor When driving a 400 V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation Torque characteristics and temperature rise When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor If constant torque is required in the low speed range use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an externally powered ventilating fan Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 H
111. measured capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor H43 displays the cumulative run time of the cooling fan H44 displays the startup times of motor 1 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Startup Times of Motor 1 A46 Startup Times of Motor 2 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm er r on the LED monitor and issues alarm output ALM to the digital output terminal specified see E20 E21 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of key key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as for data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running of the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of t key key For details refer to the description of H97 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor I A N H47 displays the initial value of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards H48 displays the cumulative run time of the capacitors mounted on the printed c
112. mock alarms that have been caused by H45 at the time of machine setup both of which are saved in the inverter memory Setting the H97 data to 1 clears the saved alarm data Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of key key After that the H97 data automatically reverts to 0 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b input phase loss protection c output phase loss protection and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a style of combination Bit 0 to Bit 4 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping Oh 1 or O UV Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Input phase loss protection n Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm
113. monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 7 Protective Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode making it possible to start or stop the motor Power ON Setting of function codes Run Stop of motor Monitor of running status Monitor of running status I O signal states and maintenance info 2 Y 4 t 4 Y Na fog z E n y r Occurrence 7 Pi T Al P4 ofanalarm 5 7 S 2 i Press this key if an alarm has occurred Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Figure 3 2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode the transition between menu items in Programming mode and the transition between alarm codes at different occurrences in Alarm mode 3 1 e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO Running mode Progr
114. more detailed information vii CONTENTS Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi Vel NO 1 1 1 2 Control System eene tee ER ED tee Ee Ere en eerte eR 1 11 L3 Recommended Corifiguration 2 ett eot te vous de ue Ea fe e rena e ddp pre cocida 1 13 Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks ooooonnoconnnonococononcccnonannnonnnncononanocconnnnoconnnnnonnonnnacinonos 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad esses 2 2 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 Overview of Operation Mod s cit e tpe ie ee Renee ti tetro tie rependere Seon 3 1 32 Runmng Modesto eb Ron 3 3 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status oconncnononnnocnononcnononncnncnnco eene ea E E EEE innere nnne enne trennen enne 3 3 3 2 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands ooooocconoconnoconaccnnononnnnnnononononnonncnncn rennen enne nre nennen tenerent 3 4 32 3 Running stopping the motor 1 uice ia eh eei ERR HR ERR 3 9 3 2 4 JOSIE OPeratlon se ei RU dre RED e UU REOS 3 9 3 3 Programming Mode esit Ue pee eer term eL betonen tos 3 10 3 3 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup eese 3 12 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting eese 3 16 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking sese 3 17 3 3 4 Monitoring the run
115. more than two jump frequency bands overlap the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit Refer to the figure on the lower right Internal referanca Internal referer oe reguancy Ir amp quency Jurne frequency Band cod 4 om la amm Actual Janpi EEG A ump frequency and Band CA i Jump frequency 2 CD Any frequency 1 C01 Jump JA tendency Jump irequency 2 Band L p C02 CH Jump frequency 1 ux Reference frequency Reference frequency m Jump frequencies 1 2 and 3 C01 C02 and C03 Specify the center of the jump frequency band Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band m Jump frequency hysteresis width C04 Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width Data setting range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 1 to 15 m These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15 Turning terminal commands SSI SS2 SS4 and SS8 ON OFF selectively switches the reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps For details of the terminal function assignment refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function Data setting range 0 00 to 400 0 Hz The combinati
116. normal inverse operation Final operation for frequency command 1 C53 P 0 Normal operation Normal 1 Inverse operation Inverse fole When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter the VS terminal command is used to switch the PID controller output reference frequency between normal and inverse and has no effect on any normal inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function m Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a field bus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter LL For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or field bus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals m Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 Thi
117. of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter Yes output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output f fault orana lt Alarm reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the 5 key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the eri Yes detection data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error between er2 Yes communications the inverter and the keypad during operation using the standard error detection keypad or multi function keypad optional CPU error Ifthe inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise or er3 Yes detection some other factors this function stops the inverter 8 31 Not applicable LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the er4 communications inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output error detection Option error When an option card has detected an error this function stops er5 detection the inverter output Operation STOP Pressing the 5 9 key on the key
118. operation terminal command HLD holds the run forward terminal command FWD and the run reverse terminal command REV This allows you to run the inverter in 3 Wire Operation Refer to the function code E01 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details If you do not assign the 3 wire operation command HLD to any digital input terminals the 2 Wire Operation using the commands FWD and REV will take effect S06 2 byte data of bit 15 through bit 0 programmable bitwise the operation command via the communications link includes Bit 0 assigned to FWD Bit 1 assigned to REV Bit 13 XF and bit 14 XR Programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs FWD and REV In the block diagram all of these are denoted as operation commands The data setting for function code E98 to select the function of terminal FWD and E99 of REV determine which bit value should be selected as the run command If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to select the function of FWD or REV the output of bit 13 14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure 4 2 If either one of bits 13 and 14 is ON 1 as a logic value the OR logic output will make the enable communications link command LE turn on This is the same as with bit O and 1 If run commands FWD and REV are concurrently turned on then logic forcibly makes the internal run commands FWD and REV turn off If you set data 1 or 3 up to the function code H96 STOP key priority Sta
119. overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 and Y2 by setting function code E20 and E21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 Overview of Function Codes for details 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 Y2 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 Y2 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output circuit specifications Control circuit Photocoupler Current Figure 8 7 Transistor Output Circuit Item Max Operation ON level 3V voltage OFF level 27V Maximum motor current at ON 50 mA Leakage current at OFF 0 1 mA Figure 8 8 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC Mote When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case Transistor output common Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s Transistor output 8 3 Terminal Specifications Related Functions function co
120. patterns to control output frequency E p 4 A y Linear Default S curve Weak S curve Strong Curvilinear Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output frequency Acc time E Dec time Reference i Reference si edt Acc time Dec time frequency SS F03 A01 Time Acceleration deceleration time S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 1004 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 2096 or more of the maximum f
121. regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 Automatic Deceleration Mode selection For details about the function of H76 refer to the description of H69 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2 The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the machine Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 00 to 0 40 These are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access them Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor iz The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears in decimal notation on the keypad DC Braking Braking response mode F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking staring frequency Braking level and Braking time A09 to A11 DC Braking 2 Braking
122. running phases Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor Data for H69 Function Disable Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enable Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FOS E11 FH ole Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a brake unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the d
123. s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Reducing noise Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC Directive Refer to Appendices App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise for details Measures against surge currents If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close of the phase advancing capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter Megger test When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SIA7 1094 E Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test Control circuit wiring length When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and operator panel to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the inverter may Wiring length overheat or trip due to overcurrent because a higher harmonics current between invert
124. setting 1 Multi frequency 7 HO Multi frequency 8 C12 O Multi frequency 9 C13 O Multi frequency 10 HO IO tO a9 IO O 919017 1OH1NOO HOW SWVHDVIG 10019 harto Auxiliary frequency setting 2 5 O or E gt i x O 3 l E cal Oj5 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 Terminal C1 C1 function Terminal C1 V2 function 2 Refer to block diagrams of PID control block for details gt a 8 For details of the options refer to the instruction manual for each option LX Notes When PID control is enabled the control logic differs from this block diagram Gain S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details Figure 4 1 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Output Stage This page is intentionally left blank 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Figures 4 1 1 and 4 1 2 show the processes that generate the internal drive frequency command through the various frequency command and switching steps by means of function codes When the PID control is active J01 1 to 3 the logic differs from that of this block diagram Refer to Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block Additional and suppleme
125. standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN EILI L1J Moorcagaciy Nena Rued meme un gx nata n pins A A ye sid Hz P02 A16 KW PO3 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 06 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 66 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 30 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 L5 6 10 3 01 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 25 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 67 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 5 11 0 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 42 0 17 7 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 55 0 20 0 3 25 16 37 18 50 to 21 99 67 0 21 4 2 92 16 58 Q 3 22 00 to 30 00 78 0 25 1 2 70 16 00 a 400 V class series Example for FRN EILI L1J z Moorcapacity Nominat Raed Notead ar f gx Rated sip a puma A A 6 76 Hz Q P02 A16 KW P03 A17 POG A20 PO7 A21 POS A22 P12 A26 m 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 022 020 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 53 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 83 10 20 13 66
126. staring frequency Braking level and Braking time For setting of DC braking refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 9 2 Overview of Function Codes STOP Key Priority Start Check Function H97 H96 specifies a functional combination of STOP key priority and Start check function as listed below Data for H96 STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable m STOP key priority Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS 485 communications link link operation pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor After that er 6 appears on the LED monitor m Start check function For safety this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following situations If it has been turned ON the inverter does not start up with alarm code er 6 displayed on the LED monitor When the power to the inverter is turned ON When the 55 key is pressed to release the alarm status or when the Reset alarm terminal command RST digital input is turned ON When the run command source is switched by the Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus terminal command LE digital input Clear Alarm Data H45 Mock Alarm H97 clears all alarm data alarm history and relevant information of alarms that have occurred in running of the inverter and
127. temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V The temperature at which the overheating protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature The detection level voltage is specified based on the change of the internal resistance PTC thermistor internal resistance A Rp2 Rp1 Temperature Alarm temperature 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp the detection level voltage V is calculated by the expression below Set the result V to function code H27 250xRp 250 R 250xRp 1000 550 R Vy2 x10 V Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal C1 with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level voltage specified by H27 Loa PTE thermistor 210 Vv Ypi Mode selection 5 26 1 kii 1 l Wwe 4 l JI PTC i n Camparatar T HY ihermestor p i Rp 50 0 w 11 I I Thermistor detection y bevel H27 DW nn i ate To use analog input terminal C1 for the PTC thermistor input turn switches SW7 and SW8 on the interface printed circuit board to the specified positions and set E59 data to 0 C1 function For details refer to Settin
128. than one specified for the time long enough and turn on the brake terminal command BRKS OFF Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Note The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1 If the motor switching E function selects motor 2 the braking signal always remains at state of turning on When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast to stop terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter the braking signal turns on immediately J69 Brake OFF J 1 Brake ON fraguency frequency i F23 Ssart oe 1 Sta Img ELEY AAE Ei p T F25 Siop frequency Diutpul fraguency LF24 Starting freguency 1 i F3 Stop frequency Holding time Holding lime JE Releasing aiment lgmvM A __ Output currant i Rid EE ee Bra EN i rame signal BRAS E 470 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer These are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access them 9 118 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 9 2 8 ycodes Link functions y01 to y20 RS 485 Communication Standard and option Up to two ports of RS 485 communications link are available including the terminal block option as shown below Function code Applicable equipment Standard RS 485 y01 through y10 Standard keypad Communications for Multi function keypad connection with keypad FRENIC Loader via RJ 45 port Host equipment Optional RS 485 y11 through y20 Host e
129. the filter for feedback signals in detail under PID dancer control apply filter time constants for analog input C33 C38 and C43 9 111 J10 J11 J12 J13 PID Control Anti reset windup J10 suppresses overshoot in control with PID processor As long as the deviation between the feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration operation Data setting range 0 0 to 200 96 PID feedback Pv in his range mbegralion does nod take place PID command in this range migration pre sel value 54 takes place in his range mniegration does rol take place Time PID Control Select alarm output PID Control Upper level alarm AH PID Control Lower level alarm AL Two types of alarm signals can be output associated with PID control absolute value alarm and deviation alarm You need to assign the PID alarm output PID ALM to one of the digital output terminals function code data 42 m Select alarm output J11 J11 specifies the alarm type The table below lists all the alarms available in the system Data for J11 Alarm Description Absolute value While PV AL or AH PV PID ALM is ON alarm 7 E PIO feedback e FID control PIO control ids Lower level Upper level alarm ALi alam LAH II 13 112 Absolute value Same as above with Hold alarm with Hold Absolute value Same as above with Latch
130. the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously specified m PID Control Upper limit of PID process output J18 J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter High F15 will serve as the upper limit m PID Control Lower limit of PID process output J19 J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter Low F16 will serve as the lower limit PID Control Speed command filter Not used PID Control Dancer reference position J57 specifies the dancer reference position in 100 to 100 for dancer control The reference position can be specified as the function code from the keypad by this function code if J02 0 keypad or as typical operation of the PID command For the setting procedure of the PID command refer to Chapter 3 PID Control Detection width of dancer position deviation PID Control P Gain 2 PID Control I Integral time 2 PID Control D Differential time 2 The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of the dancer reference position the dancer reference position detection bandwidth J58 the inverter switches PID constants from the combination of J03 JO4 and JO5 to that of J59 J60 and J61 respectively in its PID processor Giving a boost to the system response by raising the P gain ma
131. the inverter saves the output frequency being the power failure applied at that time and shuts down the output so that the occurred for general motor enters a coast to stop state loads If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure frequency at which Enable restart After a momentary power failure restoring power and Restart at the IN a run dec Ped the vac at the starting frequency Starting frequency specified by function code 3 for low inertia load This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure ud Tin When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can apply which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without stopping it Refer to H09 A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the machinery or equipm
132. the motor in any of the following modes decelerate to stop coast to a stop and hit mechanical stop according to the function code J65 data PID control PID process control and PID dancer control are available Process command Keypad analog input terminals 12 and C1 and RS 485 communications Feedback value Analog input terminals 12 and C1 Alarm output absolute value alarm deviation alarm Normal operation inverse operation Anti reset windup function PID output limiter Integration reset hold Speed control slip compensation A phase and B phase B phase When the optional PG interface card is installed Auto search for idling motor speed The inverter automatically searches the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it without stopping it Automatic When the torque calculation value exceeds the limit level set for the inverter during deceleration deceleration the output frequency is automatically controlled and the deceleration time automatically extends to avoid an Ou trip Deceleration The motor loss increases during deceleration to reduce the load energy regenerating at characteristic the inverter to avoid an OU trip upon mode selection improving braking ability Auto energy saving operation The output voltage is controlled to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter loss at a constant speed Overload prevention Control T
133. the terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function For the command loss detection the continue to run frequency automatically switched to the reference frequency determined by what active frequency command is lost however the switched reference command may fluctuate due to the switching timing or the switched situation For details refer to the description of function code E65 Case that data setup for both the gain and bias will take effect concurrently is only available for the frequency command source 1 F01 For the frequency command source 2 C30 and auxiliary frequency command sources 1 and 2 E61 to E63 only setup of the gain will take effect Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for the reference frequency from the analog frequency command input signal terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function Note that the frequency command source set up by using the key is only valid for normal operation Frequency commands by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take different command formats as follows SOL the setting range is 32768 to 32767 where the maximum output frequency is obtained at 320000 05 the setting range is 0 00 to 655 35 Hz in increments of 0 01 Hz Basically priority level for the command in S01 is higher than that in S05 If a value other than 0 is set in SOI the data set in SO1 will take effect If SO1 is set at 0 data in S05 will
134. the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below Operation timing scheme Alarm facior Protective function Tripaed state Hos FOS MOS os ih 15 nd ard ah Inventor cutnul frequency Auinrmeset signal TRY Time lt Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 gt Alarm factor Protective function Tripped state 6 deu Rete command Inverter cubpul frequency Auio reset signal TRY Alarm autpul for any alarm D Tim S3009 NOILONN 4 The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output terminal Y1 Y2 or 30A B C to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with function code E20 E21 or E27 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration Data for H07 Accl Decel pattern atterns
135. to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the inverter If not the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers causing it difficult to accurately control the motor The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not exceed 50 m in length A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage current since the cable s electrostatic capacitance against the earth increases causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed EL 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Current Limiter Mode selection Current Limiter Level When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation m Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Running states that enable the current limiter Data for F43 During acceleration During constant speed Disable Enable Enable During deceleration Disable Disable Disable
136. 0 FRN4 0E1S 4E 5 5 FRNS 5E1S 40 151 283 75 FRN7 5E1S 40 227 399 11 FRNIIEIS 4LI 302 499 15 FRNISE1S 40 332 602 0 1 FRNO 1E1S 70 16 18 0 2 FRNO 2E1S 70 23 27 Single phase 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 70 36 40 200 V 0 75 FRN0 75E18 70 55 59 1 5 FRN1 5E1S 70 78 100 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 7JO 105 135 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note A box L1 in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K A 20 App E Conversion from SI Units App E Conversion from SI Units All expressions given in Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES are based on SI units The International System of Units This section explains how to convert expressions to other units 1 Conversion of units 1 Force 6 Inertia constant 1 kof 9 8 N J kg m moment of inertia e 1 N 0 102 kgf GD kg m flywheel effect 2 Torque e GD2 4 e 1 kgf m 9 8 N m e GD 1 N m 0 102 kgf m 4 3 Work and energy 7 Pressure and stress e 1 kgf m 9 8 N m 9 8 1 mmAq 9 8 Pa 9 8 N m 9 8 W s 1 Pa 1 N m2 0 102 mmAq e 1 bar 100000 Pa 1 02 kg cm e Powar 1 kg cm 98000 Pa 980 mbar 1 kgf m s 9 8 N m s 9 8 J s e 1 atmospheric pressure 1013 mbar BUE 760 mmH g 101300 Pa e 1 N m s
137. 0 01 Hz fixed Control Control method V f control Dynamic torque vector control V f control with sensor when the optional pulse generator PG interface card is installed V f characteristic Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output 200 V frequency 80 to 240 V class The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF SETS Non linear V f setting 2 points Desired voltage 0 to 240 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output 400 V frequency 160 to 500 V class The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF series Non linear V f setting 2 points Desired voltage 0 to 500 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set Torque boost Auto torque boost for constant torque load Manual torque boost Desired torque boost 0 0 to 20 0 can be set Select application load with the function code F37 A13 Variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 200 or over Reference frequency 0 5 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost Start stop operation Keypad Start and stop with and f keys standard keypad Start and stop with r and f keys optional multi function keypad External signals digital inputs Forward Reverse rotation stop command capable of 3 wire operation coast to stop command external alarm alarm reset etc Link operation
138. 0 to 400 0 Hz signal Detection F55 Level E31 FDT Detection level FDT function 0 to 30 Hz Frequency 0 0 to 10 0 Hz signal E30 Arrival Hysteresis Hysteresis width F56 Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Detection E32 FDT Hysteresis width Terminal THR 0 THR function Terminal X5 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR F57 Function 1 Write enable for keypad E05 function 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad A 34 WE KP App G Replacement Information FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Func Func tion Name Data setting range tion Name Data setting range giang Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S code code Jump 0 to 30 Hz Jump 0 0 to 30 0 Hz F58 frequency C04 frequency Hysteresis Hysteresis F59 Jump 0 to 400 Hz Cot Jump 0 00 to 400 0 Hz frequency 1 frequency 1 F60 Jump 0 to 400 Hz C02 Jump 0 00 to 400 0 Hz frequency 2 frequency 2 F61 Jump 0 to 400 Hz C03 Jump 0 00 to 400 0 Hz frequency 3 frequency 3 F62 Base 50 to 400 Hz A02 Base 50 0 to 400 0 Hz frequency 2 frequency 2 F63 Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s E10 Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s time 2 time 2 Deceleration 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration 0 01 to 3600 s F64 E11 time 2 time 2 Torque Boost 2 1 Variable torque load Torque boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 F09 Load selection 0 Variable torque load Auto torque boost F65 A13 auto energy saving operation 2 2 Proportional to
139. 0 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 0 to 200 0 0 01 to 10 00 Ei 0 0 to 200 0 0 Motor characteristics O Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors Data copying Default Refer to setting page 9 74 9 29 9 74 9 74 9 29 9 74 9 74 9 74 9 75 9 29 9 75 9 74 9 75 9 29 9 75 9 74 9 75 9 29 9 75 9 74 9 75 9 29 9 75 9 76 Default Refer to setting page Rated capacity of motor Rated value of Fuji standard Rated value 9 78 of Fuji standard motor Rated value of Fuji standard motor Rated value of Fuji standard motor 9 78 9 79 Rated value 9 79 of Fuji standard When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 9 8 9 1 Function Code Tables H codes High Performance Functions Data Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Uni A copying setting page H03 Data Initialization Disable initialization N 9 80 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters Initialize motor 2 parameters H04 Times 0 Disable times 9 84 1to D
140. 00 s Torque Boost Conversion Table App G Replacement Information E9S E11S FRENIC Multi E9S E11S FRENIC Multi F08 E09 Data for F09 Torque boost pattern of FVR E9S E11S Data for H50 1 10 of data for F04 Output voltage Base voltage 100 Data for H51 Data for F05 x 0 100 F65 A05 A05 0 0 Data for F05 x 0 108 0 6 to 0 9 Data for F05 x 0 116 1 3 to 1 8 Data for F05 x 0 125 1 9 to 2 8 Data for FO5 x 0 133 2 6 to 3 7 Data for F05 x 0 141 3 2 to 4 6 Data for F05 x 0 149 3 8 to 5 4 Data for F05 x 0 157 4 5 to 6 3 Data for F05 x 0 166 5 1 to 7 3 Data for F05 x 0 174 5 7 to 8 2 Data for F05 x 0 182 6 4 to 9 1 Data for F05 x 0 190 7 0 to 10 0 Data for F05 x 0 198 7 7 to 10 9 Data for F05 x 0 207 8 3 to 11 9 Data for F05 x 0 215 8 9 to 12 8 Data for F05 x 0 223 9 6 to 13 7 Data for F05 x 0 231 10 2 to 14 696 Data for F05 x 0 239 10 8 to 15 4 Data for F05 x 0 248 11 5 to 16 4 Data for F05 x 0 256 12 1 to 17 3 Data for F05 x 0 264 12 8 to 18 2 Data for F05 x 0 272 13 4 to 19 1 Data for F05 x 0 280 14 0 to 20 0 Data for F05 x 0 289 14 7 to 21 0 Data for F05 x 0 297 15 3 to 21 9 Data for F05 x 0 305 15 9 to 2
141. 1 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Base frequency 50 to 400 Hz 1 Base frequency 1 50 0 to 400 0 Hz 200 V series 0 80 to 240 V Rated voltage 1 0V The output voltage in proportion to the power supply Rated voltage at base frequency 1 80 to 240 V for 200 V class series 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series 0 V Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage voltage is set 400 V series 0 320 to 480 V Maximum output voltage 1 80 to 240 V for 200 V class series If F05 0 set the same voltage as FO5 data If F05 0 you can set an arbitrary value 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s time 1 Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600s Deceleration 0 01 to 3600 s time 1 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600s Torque boost 1 0 Automatic torque boost Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 1 Constant torque load 1 Variable torque load Torque boost 1 0 Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 0 Variable torque load 2 Proportional torque load 3 to 31 Constant torque load A 31 Torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Frequency Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix for setting torque boost FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Name
142. 1 and 2 above First it explains the output torque obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter FRENIC Multi 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics Figures 7 1 and 7 2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and output torque respectively Curves a through f depend on the running conditions 250 deyo Culput frequency Az 50 Output torque 55 100 150 250 Sal LIOVdVO H3 LH3ANI ANY HOLON TWWILdO ONILO3 T3S Figure 7 1 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 50 Hz 7 1 Qutput frequency Hz Output torque 55 Figure 7 2 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 60 Hz 1 Continuous allowable driving torque Curve a in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve a shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous rated current where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration When the motor runs at the base frequency of 60 Hz 100 output torque can be obtained at 50 Hz the output torque is somewhat lower than that in commercial power and it further lowers at lower frequencies The reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving and that at lower frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventila
143. 1 LE Pressing 4 keys controls OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output ON Keypad primary PID command disabled Frequency OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output Other than the above ON Current primary PID command disabled Frequency Fo Link disabled 4 FH 0 Lee OFF Primary fraquency po command free a 552 551 OFF keypad A n Frequency setting C I 7 other than abows Soo Ls Final frequency command Command via link E re Mult fraquancy i PID cancal command i HEFID ON FID output as frequemcy command 3 8 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and oe A PAN kk Xr pressing the amp key decelerates the motor to stop mem C The key is enabled only in Running mode The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of function code F02 e deyo E Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and key Table 3 6 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 6 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor In the direction commanded by terminal FWD or REV QV
144. 1 and for 0 00 to 99 99 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 9 13 9 6 9 1 Function Code Tables E code continued Default Refer to Code Data setting range setting page E98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 9 43 terminals FWD and REV as listed below 9 69 E99 Terminal REV Function 1000 Select multi frequency 1001 Select multi frequency 1002 Select multi frequency 1003 Select multi frequency 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop 1008 Reset alarm 1009 Enable external alarm trip 1010 Ready for jogging 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 Enable DC braking 1014 Select torque limiter level 1017 UP Increase output frequency 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency 1019 Enable data change with keypad 1020 Cancel PID control 1021 Switch normal inverse operation 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI 1026 Enable auto search for idli
145. 100 Analog output 25 to 6000 p s Pulse rate at 100 output F42 Pulse rate F33 FM Maximum frequency setting x FVR E9S s amplifier Pulse rate data Terminal X4 0 RT1 function Terminal X4 4 Select ACC DEC time RT1 F43 Function 1 Terminal X4 function E04 function 3 Select multi frequency SS8 2 VF2 function 12 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 3 HLD function 6 Enable 3 wire operation HLD F44 Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 Hz C12 Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz F45 8to 15 C13 8 to 15 F46 C14 F47 C15 F48 C16 F49 C17 F50 C18 F51 C19 Frequency 0 02 to 5 00 s Analog Input 0 02 to 5 00 s command filter C33 adjustment for 12 Filter time F52 constant Analog Input 0 02 to 5 00 s adjustment for C38 C1 Filter time constant Timer 0 Disable Timer 0 Disable operation 1 0 01 to 3600 s operation 1 Enable F53 time C21 The time can be specified within the range from 1 to 3600 s in units of 1 s with the and keys on the keypad Terminal Y1 0 Inverter running RUN Terminal Y1 0 Inverter running RUN 1 Frequency level detection FDT function 2 Frequency detected FDT 2 Frequency equivalence signal FAR 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR F54 3 Undervoltage detection signal LU E20 3 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 4 Torque limiting TL LU 5 Auto restarting 5 Inverter output limiting OL 6 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF FDT function 0 to 400 0 Hz Frequency 0
146. 13 If communications link is recovered continue operation Otherwise display an RS 485 communications error er 8 for y02 and er p for y12 and stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Continue to run even when a communications error occurs MA For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b m Timer y03 and y13 y03 or y13 specifies an error processing timer When the set timer count has elapsed because of no response on other end etc if a response request was issued the inverter interprets that an error occurs See the section of No response error detection time y08 y18 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s 9 120 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Baud rate y04 and y14 y04 and y14 specify the transmission speed Data for y04 for RS 485 communications and y14 Setting for FRENIC Loader Set the same transmission speed as that specified by the connected PC Transmission speed bps m Data length y05 and y15 y05 and y15 specify the character length Data for y05 for transmission and y15 Data length Setting for FRENIC Loader 0 8 bits Loader sets the length in 8 bits automatically The same applies to the 1 7 bits Modbus RTU protocol m Parity check y06 and y16 y06 and y16 specify the property of the Data for y06 parity bit and y16 Setting for FRENIC Loader None Loader sets it to the even parity 2 stop bits fo
147. 18 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external F01 Frequency Command 1 F02 Operation Method F08 Deceleration Time 1 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start F09 Torque Boost 1 percentage with respect to F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 on the Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 1 3 or 4 inverter capacity F10 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 Fora general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 9 21 Protection for Motor 1 2 Foran inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan F11 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable f 100 of the 0 01 to 100 00 motor rated 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the curent motor F12 Thermal time constant F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Disable restart Trip immediately Table A 4 9 24 Failure Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Vode selection Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load E15_ Frequency Limiter High TAREA DSO TE E SETA 928 F16 Lo owas os ps ST a r F18 9 29 F20 DC Braking 1 9 32 Braking starting frequency F21 Braking level F22 Braking time F28 Starting Frequency 1 9 33 F24 Holding time F25 0 1 F
148. 19 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 001 en 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Run command 9 93 Follow H30 data 9 123 Follow H30 data y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Follow H30 data Via field bus option y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection Follow H30 data Via field bus option Frequency command Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Via field bus option Via field bus option Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader 9 123 Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination Shipping Destination Function code Asia China EU Japan Taiwan ana Remarks F03 A01 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 F04 A02 60 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 F05 A03 220 200 230 200 200 For 200 V class series F06 A04 380 380 400 400 400 For 400 V class series F14 1 1 0 1 1 F26 2 2 15 2 2 E31 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 E46 1 0 1 0 1 9 13 9 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters In each code group its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the identifying numbers for ease of access Note that function codes closely related each other for the implementation of an inverter s operation
149. 2 38 The selected wires are for use with 3 phase input output lines 3 wires 6 22 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications 1 External potentiometer for frequency setting An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 through 13 of the inverter as shown in Figure 6 13 Model RJ 13 BA 2 B characteristics 1 kQ 3 5 a 9 6 Shaft C pP E E H C a N d M8 AMI 15 _6513 3 P 0 75 10 4552 25 1 Dial plate type YS549810 0 Knob type MSS 2SB 1 05 50 03 2 3 el a 10 a em O 60 6 p FREO SET 226 40 1 910 Unit mm Note The dial plate and knob must be ordered as separated items Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model WAR3W 3W B characteristics 1 kQ 23 20 Eo Dial plate Knob 26 6 C 1D g J s EE 7 6 oy Vip Unit mm Note The dial plate and knob are supplied together with the external potentiometer WAR3W Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Inverter External potentiometer Figure 6 13 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example 6 23 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOJ3 T3S 2
150. 2 FRN22ETS4n 20 20 20 44 20 20 2o 82 2o 20 2o 55 phase Xm DDD 90 MON ss eese 20 zo 20 ros 20 eo zu irs eo 20 23 E 20 2 0 18 24 Ps wee an as 20 20 ass ao ss os ase os as 20 30 on mwoiie 20 20 20 11 29 29 20 1 20 20 2o 08 om 02 jeenoze1s70 20 20 20 20 20 20 29 33 20 20 20 t5 prose 04 rose TO 20 20 ao ss ao ao 20 s4 zo zo zo so AN Sm fores zo pas 2 f er 28 2o aot ar 29 feo 50 50 E Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 6 6 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals W if the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40 C or below Table 6 3 Cont for DC reactor braking resistor control circuit and inverter grounding Recommended wire size mm Power plis DC reactor Braking resistor ESE cd supply PP IC Inverter type P1 PC uU Sc voltage kW wable temp Current Current 1 Allowable temp 1 al w foce abus A 30T FRNO 1E1S 20 20 2 20 20 20 EUM Eas PANES aH So apo 0 4 FRNO4
151. 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 15 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 51 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 60 243 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 50 3 84 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 5 5 50 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 14 5 6 25 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 0 8 85 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 5 10 0 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 34 0 10 7 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 22 39 0 12 6 2 70 16 00 0 90 m When Fuji standard 6 series motors P99 3 or A39 3 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN EILI L1J Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load Rated slip kW applied current current frequency motor A A Hz P02 A16 RW P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 00 12 61 13 63 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 56 10 20 14 91 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 35 8 67 10 66 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 00 6 55 11 26 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 70 5 79 11 22 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 2 10 7 5 09 13 66 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 70 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 42 0 17 6 3 78 15 12 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 55 0 20 0 3 24 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 67 0 21 9 2 90 17 00 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 22 78
152. 2 8 Data for F05 x 0 313 16 6 to 23 7 Data for F05 x 0 321 17 2 to 24 6 Data for F05 x 0 329 1 10 of base frequency Torque boost pattern of FRENIC Multi Output voltage Base voltage 100 H51 F09 A05 With non linear V f pattern Without non linear V f pattern 17 9 to 25 4 Base frequency H50 A 47 Base frequency Glossary This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual Acceleration time Period required when an inverter accelerates its output from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency Related function codes F03 F07 E10 and H54 Alarm mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter If the inverter detects any malfunction error or fault in its operation it immediately shuts down or trips the output to the motor and enters this mode in which corresponding alarm codes are displayed on the LED monitor Alarm output for any faults A mechanical contact output signal that is generated when the inverter is halted by an alarm by short circuiting between terminals 30A and 30C Related function code E27 See Alarm mode Analog input An external voltage or current input signal to give the inverter the frequency command The analog voltage is applied on the terminal 12 the current on the C1 These terminals are also used to input the signal from the external potentiometer PTC
153. 200 lo zAD Y peg AER fuecdiani l Oa 14 15 50 Bn 1 7 25 53 mT 54 FE iaa I na 166 515 ay Certa ul 150 ul r tad turi fes 1 min nO 053 Fale cuir iA Fabia Mesia Az 2n mir Phases voltage hequency Thiza phmai 200 ho 240 4 OVBO HE ola PSU arial Volga 10 19 Paa oneulancu Z9 er ri P Frase 5 la 5 NT os noz 18 ao 67 sa we sa ma fete DOM a1 15 11 43 25 val zz 3 127 Required power supei capacity iv A x 03 E 1 1 a 25 45 Ta 10 Torque 55 7 isi tol 7 a z Tiens w g o 150 Fixed gue 64 DX braking Sling Prquaecy 5 1 in ma Hr Drain irma nn Bi HD irang imat 0 TES el rated nummi Brat b rrgsicw Busan Appiah aret eimatania ULAG C22 Shed Eris r m caniosuse JECHA PD UL apes type Coding meth Bri dd obra Fm soning ogi Maria deg na 06 n wr 17 23 g deyo 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 A
154. 26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency kz Y 9 34 F27 Tone Level 0 Inactive Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 The shaded function codes 1 are applicable to the quick setup When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table A Default Settings Depending on the Shipping Destination on page 9 13 9 3 6 deyo S3009 NOILONNA F code continued Default Refer to Code Data setting range g setting page F29 Analog Output FM 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA Y Y 9 35 Vode selection 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s F30 Voltage adjustment F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV 16 PID output MV F33 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 FMP Pulse rate at 100 output F37 Load Select
155. 48 Output current Inverter output current expressed in RMS A Output voltage Inverter output voltage expressed in RMS V Calculated torque Output torque of the motor Input power Inverter s input power kW PID command value frequency PID feedback amount Refer to E40 and E41 Refer to E40 and E41 Timer value for timer operation Remaining time of timer operation specified s PID output value 100 at maximum frequency Load factor Inverter s load factor 96 Motor output Motor output KW f 0 Disable is set for function code JO1 appears on the LED monitor Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed monitoring formats selectable with E48 LED Monitor Define the speed monitoring format on the LED monitor as listed below Data for E48 Display format of the sub item Output frequency before slip compensation Expressed mE Output frequency after slip compensation Expressed m H2 Reference frequency Expressed in Hz Motor speed in r min 120 Number of poles P01 x Frequency Hz Load shaft speed in r min oe for speed indication E50 x Frequency Line speed in m min NAM for speed indication E50 x Frequency Constant feeding rate time Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency min Hz x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 9 2 Overview of Function Codes
156. 48 E Setting up a frequency command Using and keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 i keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 If you need to change the frequency command press the i i key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned on next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Pa Tin e If you have set function code F01 to 0 i keys on keypad but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then the and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency e When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit e After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the key holding down the key for m
157. 5 to 7 5 kW ben eren nnno po o pu pe pu A Direction of wire guide A 30 G 3 Function codes App G Replacement Information This section describes the replacement information related to function codes that are required when replacing the conventional inverter series e g FVR E9S and FVR E11S with the FRENIC Multi series It also provides the conversion table for the torque boost setting FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi F Fundamental functions FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Data 0 The data can be changed protection 1 The data cannot be changed Data protection 0 Disable data protection and digital reference protection 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Frequency 0 Setting by keypad panel operation command 1 Frequency command 1 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad 1 Setting by voltage and current input Frequency command 1 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Operation method 0 Keypad operation Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Operation by external input Operation method 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV digital input Maximum 50 to 400 Hz frequency 1 Maximum frequency
158. 50 kVA and X is 5 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Note A box L1 in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 3 g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 2 Common Specifications Output frequency Item Explanation Remarks PE 25 to 400 Hz frequency Base frequency 25 to 400 Hz o a Starting 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Duration 0 0 to 10 0 s E frequency E Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz o un Note When the carrier frequency is set at 6 kHz or above it may automatically drop depending upon the ambient temperature or output current to protect the inverter Automatic carrier frequency reduction stop function available Carrier frequency modulation with spread spectrum for noise reduction Accuracy Stability Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Setting resolution Analog setting 1 3000 of maximum frequency ex 0 02 Hz at 60 Hz 0 04 Hz at 120 Hz Digital setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 Hz or more Link setting Selectable from 2 types 1 20000 of maximum frequency ex 0 003 Hz at 60 Hz 0 006 Hz at 120 Hz
159. 63 Terminal 12 gt Terminal C1 C1 function gt Terminal C1 V2 function PID control Select alarm output 2 For details of the options refer to the instruction manual for each option Note PIO control Upper level alarm AH S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 PID control Lower level alarm AL Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details Figure 4 5 2 PID Dancer Control Block Output Stage 4 17 Figures 4 5 1 and 4 5 2 show block diagrams of the PID control block input and output stages respectively when the PID dancer control is enabled JO1 3 The logic shown generates the Drive frequency command according to the various PID command such as the dancer reference position and its PID feedback the primary frequency command and their switching means Additional and supplemental information is given below For the primary frequency command the inverter disables the command loss detection and switching between the normal and inverse operation Multi frequency commands 1 2 and 3 are exclusively applicable to the primary frequency For logics common to the drive frequency command block refer to 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block To use any of analog input terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function for a PID command dancer reference position input be sure properly configure data of function codes E60 E61 E62 and J02 Multi frequency commands 4 8 a
160. 7 Protective Functions The table below lists the name of the protective functions description alarm codes on the LED monitor presence of alarm output at terminals 30A B C and related function codes If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor remove the cause of activation of the alarm function referring to FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SI47 1094 E Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During Oc1 Yes protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration overload Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit Danny 0c2 deceleration Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due toa ground During running at 0c3 fault in the output circuit This protection 1s S constant speed effective only during startup of the inverter If you turn ON the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During Oui Yes protection an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for acceleration three phase 200 V 800 VDC for 7 three phase 400 V class series in the DC During 0u2 link bus deceleration This protection is not assured if extremely During running at 0u3 large AC line v
161. 703 664 625 2 x 250 1307 1251 1195 1130 1066 1001 871 834 787 741 2 x 325 1527 1462 1397 1321 1245 1169 1018 974 920 866 2 x 400 1751 1676 1602 1515 1428 1341 1167 1117 1055 993 2 x 500 1978 1894 1809 1711 1613 1515 1318 1262 1192 1122 A 24 App G Replacement Information App G Replacement Information When replacing Fuji conventional inverter series FVR E9S FVR E11S with the FRENIC Multi series refer to the replacement information given in this section G 1 External dimensions comparison tables Below is a guide that helps in using the comparison tables on the following pages Mounting area Allows comparing the mounting area required for the FRENIC Multi series Multi 96 with that for the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the area for the FRENIC Multi series to be 100 If this value is greater than 10096 it means that the mounting area required for the FRENIC Multi series is smaller than that of other series Volume Multi Allows comparing the volume of the FRENIC Multi series with that of the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the volume of the FRENIC Multi series to be 100 If this value is greater than 100 it means that the volume of the FRENIC Multi is smaller than that of other series In the FRENIC Multi columns dimensions in shaded boxes denote that they are smaller than those of FVR E9S and FVR E11S series In the FVR E9S and FVR E11S columns underli
162. 75 FRN15E1S 40 DB15 4 34 4 75 0 375 ae s cm s Single DBO 75 2 100 hase FRNO 4E1S 70 0 044 22 Ec V FRNO 75E1S 70 17 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1S 70 DB2 2 2 40 34 0 075 10 FRN2 2E1S 70 33 30 0 077 7 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 6 14 6 4 Selecting Options 1 2 10 ED model Braking resistor P DB Pre DE Inverter Figure 6 7 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model and Connection Example Table 6 7 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model Power Continuous braking Repetitive braking u Resistance 100 braking torque each cycle is less than 100 s supply Inverter type Type Q ty RO voltage 9 Discharging Braking time Average allowable Duty cycle capability KWs s loss KW ED FRNO 1E1S 20 1000 100 FRNO 2E1S 20 500 75 DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 FRNO 4E1S 20 250 37 FRNO 75E1S 20 133 20 FRN1 5E1S 20 73 14 Tues DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 phase FRN2 2E1S 20 50 200V FRN3 7E1S 20 DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1S 20 DB5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275 40 FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 FRN11E1S 20 DB11 2C 10 55 10 0 55 FRN15E1S 20 DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75
163. 8 LED Monitor Speed monitor TT 0 in COMPE Before slip compensation 9 64 Output frequency After slip compensation 9 66 Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Constant feeding rate time 9 66 Data 0 001 E 9999 E52 Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 and 1 9 67 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition 0 Current input C1 function 4 to 20 mADC 9 68 C1 V2 Function 1 Voltage input V2 function O to 10 VDC E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function as listed below E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function None C1 function Auxiliary frequency command 1 E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function Auxiliary frequency command 2 V2 function PID command 1 PID feedback amount E65 Reference Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop 9 69 Continuous running frequency 20 to 120 999 Disable The shaded function codes EH are applicable to the quick setup When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 0
164. 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 5 2 00 1 22 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 3 00 1 54 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 5 80 2 80 4 20 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 7 90 3 57 3 15 20 81 1 17 5 00 to 7 49 5 12 6 4 78 3 34 23 57 1 50 7 50 to 9 99 7 5 18 6 6 23 2 65 28 91 1 17 10 00 to 14 99 10 25 3 8 75 2 43 30 78 1 17 15 00 to 19 99 15 37 3 12 7 2 07 29 13 1 00 20 00 to 24 99 20 49 1 9 20 2 09 29 53 1 00 25 00 to 29 99 25 60 0 16 7 1 75 31 49 1 00 Q 30 00 to 39 99 30 72 4 19 8 1 90 32 55 1 00 2 400 V class series Motor capacity Nominal cae Dads R PX pa a lied current current ud a A A Hz HED P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 P02 A16 0 01 to 0 11 1 10 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 34 0 27 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 0 70 0 56 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 5 1 00 0 61 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 1 50 0 77 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 2 90 1 40 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 4 00 1 79 3 15 20 81 5 00 to 7 49 5 6 30 2 39 3 34 23 57 7 50 to 9 99 7 5 9 30 3 12 2 65 28 91 10 00 to 14 99 10 12 7 4 37 2 43 30 78 15 00 to 19 99 15 18 7 6 36 2 07 29 13 20 00 to 24 99 20 24 6 4 60 2 09 29 53 25 00 to 29 99 25 30 0 8 33 1 75 31 49 30 00 to 39 99 30 36 2 9 88 1 90 32 55 S3009 NOILONNA 2 00 to 2 99 Auto reset Times Auto reset Reset interval H04 and HOS specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automati
165. A02 Bias A value to be added to an analog input frequency to modify and produce the output frequency Related function codes F18 C50 to C52 Braking torque Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a rotating motor or the force required to stop a running motor Power Inverter Motor During accelerating or running at constant speed Power Inverter During decelerating Messo If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural stopping time coast to stop determined by a moment of inertia for a load machine then the motor works as a generator when it decelerates causing the kinetic energy of the load to be converted to electrical energy that is returned to the inverter from the motor If this power regenerative power is consumed or accumulated by the inverter the motor generates a braking force called braking torque Carrier frequency Frequency used to establish the modulation period of a pulse width under the PWM control system The higher the carrier frequency the closer the inverter output current approaches a sinusoidal waveform and the quieter the motor becomes Related function code F26 Coast to stop If the inverter stops its output when the motor is running the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial force Communications link function A feature to control an inverter from external equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a PC or PLC Related function
166. B m Display coefficients for PID process command and its feedback J01 1 or 2 E40 specifies coefficient A that determines the display value at 100 of the PID process command or its feedback and E41 specifies coefficient B that determines the display value at 0 The display value is determined as follows Display value PID process command or its feedback 100 x Display coefficient A B B Value displayed A PID display coefficient A E40 PID display coefficient B PID process command 0 100 PID feedback Example Maintaining the pressure around 16 kPa sensor voltage 3 13 V while the pressure sensor can detect 0 to 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 to 5 V Select terminal 12 as a feedback terminal and set the gain to 200 so that 5 V corresponds to 100 9 2 Overview of Function Codes The following E40 and E41 settings allow you to monitor or specify the values of the PID process command and its feedback on the keypad as pressure E40 30 0 that determines the display value at 100 of PID process command or its feedback E41 7 5 that determines the display value at 0 of PID process command or its feedback To control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad set the value to 16 0 Value displayet PID display ooeMicient A E40 30 0 16 0 kPa PID process command PIO Teodbsck PIO display coefficient B E41 7 5 m Display coefficients for PID dancer positioning co
167. CATION 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication essere nennen nennen enne tren tenn nennen trennen 5 1 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications standard and optional esee 5 2 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port eese 5 3 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card eee 5 4 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port eren nennen nein nnen enne nete trennen enne 5 4 5 1 5 Communications support devices eene nennen ato e ether enne ener enne 5 5 52 Overview of FRENIC Lo detz 5 dl eii ORO TED epe ore oed 5 6 5 2 o ciet i t re o dade e ie Ape n c er ee a da Lp te s 5 6 5 2 2 ConnechOtestucsaacsa penis au anni ny annniads an RR a Ep P n RU e EAE 5 7 5 2 3 Punctio n Overviews iba 5 7 5 2 3 1 Setting of function code 5 omis ote ete np Gp ren tef 5 7 LIZ Mult Monto o OR Bae OD oda ee e ect dos eite Br rt aa eed 5 8 5 2 3 3 4 Running Status MONILOL Je oce teri eben e RR EL Re e Sorte E PE RAE te bt reed 5 9 DATA STest r ntung a qoe be ORE 5 10 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in Waveforms eeeesss 5 11 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 6 11 Configurmg the ERENIC Multi 5 aeo e pe te e e ia erede pa et e e eed 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals eese ener
168. Calculate the minimum acceleration torque See Figure 7 4 The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short time output torque base frequency 60 Hz explained in Section 7 1 1 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time and the load torque tL NG during constant speed running calculated in the above 1 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed 3 Calculate the acceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 10 in Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation to calculate the acceleration time If the calculated acceleration time is longer than the expected time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Motor output tarque c Lead tongue al Corian sed Minimum socaleration torque H ma u Sprej Figure 7 4 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque deyo Sal LIOVdVO H3 LH3ANI ANY HOLON TWWILdO ONILO3 T3S 3 c Torque 4 Deceleration time For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 2 To calculate the deceleration time check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Same as for the acceleration time 2 Calculate the minimum deceleration torque See Figures 7 5 and 7 6 Same as for the deceleration time 3 C
169. E05 Switch normal inverse operation terminal command IVS function code data 21 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 9 2 4 P codes Motor 1 parameters Motor 1 No of poles A15 Motor 2 No of poles PO1 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 No of poles Motor 1 Rated capacity A16 Motor 2 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Motor speed r min x Frequency Hz When P99 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 When P99 1 Motor 1 Rated current A17 Motor 2 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Motor 1 Auto tuning A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter 6 deu In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limi
170. E1S 20 20 20 2 0 20 1 2 0 75 FrNO7SEtS20 20 EBENEN 2 0 Three zo feof 20 a8 078 07s ozs phase FRN2 2E1S 2 0 200 V E TEIS T ERR 7 125 jos p 2 0 2 0 2 0 64 3 5 EH Fio 25 29 6 m 20 20 20 91 e ewein pas haot eot re pos 29 Joy 8 0 0 4 FRNO4E1S 40 20 20 20 10 20 2 0 20 08 Ls pees 2529 25 38 28 29 25 tie mee 37 Jemezecas 20 20 20 s3 Tofer zotte osos hos 2 phase FRNA i 4E 2 20 20 20 89 20 20 20 21 S 400V ss _ FRNS 5E1S 4 20 20 20 590 20 20 20 32 Ls persa 20 20 2o wr 20 feo feo Tat 11 FRN11E1s 40 3 5 20 20 259 20 20 3 5 15 FRNi5ETS 4C 55 35 35 35 3 20 20 0 41 FRNO 1E1S 70 2 0 20 20 11 20 20 02 Jervozews7a 20 20 20 20 20 29 ops 04 ranoae1s7O m 200 V 2 Cis renters 20 20 20 12 20 20 22 FRN2 2E18 70 2 0 2 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box Ll in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above
171. FE 9 2nd frequency equivalence detection FAR2 Terminal Y1 function 0 Inverter running RUN 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR 2 Frequency detected FDT 3 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 4 Torque polarity detected D B 5 Inverter output limiting IOL Terminal Y2 function 6 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF 7 Motor overload early warning OL 30 Service life alarm LIFE 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Frequency equivalence delay 0 01 to 10 0 s A 41 Frequency arrival delay time 0 01 to 10 0 s FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Func Func tion Name Data setting range tion Name Dala seting range 9 Fang Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S code code FAR function 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Frequency 0 0 to 10 0 Hz signal arrival Foo Hysteresis a Hysteresis UE ESTAI width FDT function 0 to 400 Hz Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Hz signal detection E31 Level E31 FDT Detection Deere cete e level a E32 Hysteresis 0 0 to 30 0 Hz E32 Hysteresis 0 0 to 400 0 Hz width OL1 function 0 Electric thermal O L relay Terminal 7 Motor overload early warning OL E20 signal Y11 Y2 E21 d E33 Mode select function 1 Output current Terminal 37 Current detected ID E20 Y11 Y2 E21 4 tete eter function Level 5 to 200 of inverter rated current Overload early Current value of 5 to 200 o
172. FF Figure 8 5 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW Control circuit Control circuit Q bd PLE PLC or nm swi SOURCE O O X1 to X5 X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler SINK SINK 24 VDC CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 8 5 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact W Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 8 6 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal X1
173. FRNO 4E1S 40 250 37 DB0 75 4C 200 50 0 075 FRNO 75E1S 40 133 20 FRN1 5E1S 40 1 73 14 DB2 2 4C 160 55 0 110 FRN2 2E1S 40 50 Three M ERN37E1540 hase i NE id FRN4 0E1S 4E DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1S 40 DB5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 10 FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 FRN11E1S 40 DB11 4C 40 55 10 0 55 FRN15E1S 40 DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 FRNO 1E1S 70 1000 100 Single FRNO 2E1S 70 500 75 DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 phase FRNO 4E1S 70 250 37 200 V FRNO 75E1S 70 133 20 FRN1 5E1S 70 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 FRN2 2E1S 70 50 10 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K The 10 ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output so an electronic thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking resistor from overheating 6 15 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdleid ONILOQ3 T3S 1 3 Compact model Braking L raaigtor la S i cl nj Pr Inverter Da Figure 6 8 Braking Resistor Compact Model and Connection Example Table 6 8 Braking Resistor Compact Model Power supply TK80W1200 voltage Capacity kW Resistor Resistance Q FRNO 75 Applicable inverter model E1S 2A Nominal applied motor kW 0 75 Ave
174. Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 m Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given m Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque is the driving one and it goes ON when it is the braking one m Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Current limiting by software F43 and F44 nstantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 Overload stop Hit mechanical stop J65 3 Fila When the JOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this
175. High F15 NL Drive frequenc im um frequency ZAIN Manual speed command I A Communications tion Bus link function L l I Multi frequency 1 l Loader link A PID control P Gain C19 PID control PID control Integral time Lower limit of PID PID control rocess output J05 D Differential time P put 2 D O A Multi frequency 2 E Multi frequency 3 GD O Frequency O limiter Low A D lo oa o gt n D PID control O Select multi frequency Anti reset windup O 54 588 Hold PID integral component PID HLD PID control z i j Upper limit of PID H Reset PID integral and differential process output wo components PID RST ae O y r PID NN r gt processor 608 Lo i ams O Multi frequency 4 Q Normal inverse operation Multi frequency 8 l l po A La wl Go SNO Multi frequency 12 Switch J01 eo normal Inverse PID control operation Mode selection E PID alarm processor PID alarm PID ALM PID control Feedback filter PID control Select alarm output PID control Upper level alarm AH PID control Lower level alarm AL 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 gt Terminal C1 C1 function gt Terminal C1 V2 function 2 For details of the options refer to t
176. If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency 9 25 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 V V do DC link bus Undervoltage voltage 7 t T b Searching for EE motor speed Output frequency Se Motor speed x Acceleration Auto restarting after 4 momentary power failure i ON IPF d W Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the
177. If any wrong address beyond the above range is specified no response is returned since the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message To use FRENIC Loader set the station address that matches the connected PC m Communications error processing y02 for standard port and y12 for option port y02 and y12 specify the operation performed when an RS 485 communications error has occurred RS 485 communications errors contain logical errors such as address error parity error framing error and transmission protocol error and physical errors such as communications disconnection error set by y08 and y18 In each case these are judged as an error only when the inverter is running while the operation command or frequency command has been set to the configuration specified through RS 485 communications When neither the operation command nor frequency command is issued through RS 485 communications or the inverter is not running error occurrence is not recognized Data for y02 and y12 Function Immediately trip after showing an RS 485 communications error er 8 for y02 and erp for y12 The inverter stops with alarm issue Run during the time set on the error processing timer y03 y13 display an RS 485 communications error er 8 for y02 and er p for y12 and then stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Retry transmission during the time set on the error processing timer y03 y
178. Inactive 1 Active Thermistor Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 00 to 5 00 V Level 0 00 to 5 00 V operation 9 9 to 0 0 Hz A 44 Droop control 9 9 to 0 0 Hz FVR E11S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Serial link Function select X Valid Invalid Code Monitor Frequency Operation command command X E X 3 X X Communications link function Mode selection X Valid Invalid Code Monitor Frequency Run command command X X RS 485 Address 1 to 31 Mode select on no response error 0 Trip and alarm er 8 1 Operation for H33 timer and alarm era 2 Operation for H33 timer and retry to communicate If the retry fails then the inverter trips er 8 3 Continuous operation 0 0 to 60 0 s Baud rate 0 19200 bit s 1 9600 2 4800 3 2400 4 1200 Data length Parity check 0 8 bits 1 7 bits 0 No check 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stop bits 0 1 bit 1 2 bits No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60s Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s RS 485 Communication Standard Station address Communications error processing No response error detection Response interval 0 Immediately trip with al
179. JOS specifies the differential time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s 0 00 means that the differential component is ineffective D Differential action An operation that the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the differential value of the deviation is called D action that outputs the manipulated value that differentiates the deviation D action makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of deviation The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter that is JOS data Setting a long differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs Too long differential time makes the inverter output oscillation more Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect when the deviation occurs A Deviation i Time A MV Time 9 109 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA The combined use of P I and D actions are described below 1 PI control PI control which is a combination of P and I actions is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused by P action PI control acts to always minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs However the longer the integral time the slower the system response to quick changed control P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components 2 PD contro
180. Multi function keypad Connecting the multi function keypad on a FRENIC Multi series inverter with an optional remote operation extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S allows you to operate the inverter locally or remotely from the keypad in hand or mounted on a panel respectively In addition the multi function keypad can be used for copying function code data from a FRENIC Multi series inverter to other ones up to three inverters of function code data ep es 3 Extension cable for remote operation The extension cable connects the inverter with the keypad standard or multi function or USB RS 485 converter to enable remote operation of the inverter The cable is a straight type with RJ 45 jacks and its length is selectable from 5 3 and 1 m Cable A LS C pm o Table 6 13 Extension Cable Length for Remote Operation Type Length m CB 5S 5 CB 3S 3 CB 1S 1 6 24 6 4 Selecting Options 4 RS 485 communications card The RS 485 communications card 2 port is exclusively designed for use with the FRENIC Multi series of inverters other than with the standard port of the inverter and enables extended RS 485 communication in addition to the standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector for connecting the keypad The main functions include the following Connecting the inverter to host equipment such as a PC or PLC which enables the inverter to be controlled as a slave device
181. Notes on electrical noise cesccesceeseesceeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeteeneenaes A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices ssiri eeestis eteeriseen E E ronda anne rones ono nodo tne tret tenebo nein A 1 Noli a A 2 Noise prevention zie eee ite cere P RU i EROR ERR ESI AK di A 4 Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage cocinas aia A 12 Application to general purpose inverters ooooonoconnconccnnonconnconocononn nono ncon conocio nn nono non rennen nens A 12 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage ria A 13 Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters A 17 Generating mechanism of surge voltages eese eren nono cnc ener nennen A 17 Effectiof Surge volta coins a neto e am rp ede o ees A 18 Countermeasures against surge voltages o oonnonncnocnnonoccnacnnnononononannnonnonnonnco nono nono ene tee teen trennen A 18 Regarding existing equipment sees ener nnne nennen trennen trennt nr enne te an nora ni trennen A 19 Inverter Generating Lost A 20 Conversion from SUD Simoca teta e e ROI n A 21 Allowable Current of Insulated Wires eene ener neneen rennen A 23 Replacement Information odere en pente ede le e veta le pae eit ee rp deste eran dee A 25 External dimensions comparison tables seen eene nennen rennen A 25 Te
182. OVIG 2018 Marito 4 4 Control Block Ha8x0 1 1 Droop control Reverse D trol rotation y Acceleration ronibii roop control p deceleration pattern Maximum frequency 1 Base frequency 1 Rotational F23 Starting frequency 1 direction Holding time limitation Forward H28 0 r prohibited ACC DEC processor Deceleration mode 56 Deceleration time for forced stop Low limiter Mode selection Select ACC DEC time RT2 RT1 Acceleration Acceleration time time 1 gt S09 l H7o 0 999 Ty 1 Deceleration Deceleration l time i time 1 Y__1 H70 0 00 Acceleration time 2 ad Deceleration time 2 F Overload prevention control leration Overload fo eee ol semen prevention O 1 proce T Tif control LOT ance I 0 E HIZO 0 00 Operation H70 999 analyzer O Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving E18 4 LO Limiting level for driving Torque limiter Calculated torque Torque limiter 1 F41 Limiting level for braking Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking Braking H76 Torque limit adjuster Run LL decision Braking Automatic deceleration Calculated torque Torque limiter Automa
183. OWN control Switching command source Select frequency Reference frequency given by the command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 frequency command source used just before switching Other than UP DOWN F01 C30 Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID EID conditioner Hz PID control PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference Reference SS1 SS2 54 and SS8 frequency given by frequency at the the frequency time of previous Enable communications command source UP DOWN Communications link link via RS 485 or field used just before control bus LE switching Multi frequency Fila To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands you need to set frequency command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand Changing the PID speed command value When the UP DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON with a run command being ON causes the PID speed command to change within the range from 0 to 100 The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature or pressure with the PID display coefficients E40 E41 UP DOWN Function Data 17 Data 18 Retain PID speed command value Increase PID speed command value at a rate between 0 196 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between 0 196 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Retain PID speed command value
184. Operating the inverters by frequency command setting forward reverse running stopping coast to stop and resetting etc Monitoring the operation status of the inverter e g output frequency output current and alarm information etc Setting function code data Table 6 14 Transmission Specifications Item Specifications S o Communication protocol SX protocol Modbus RTU E D Fuji general purpose for exclusive use with Conforming to veter ooto FRENIC Loader Modicon s Modbus RTU P Electrical specifications EIA RS 485 Maximum number of units Host 1 unit Inverter 31 units connected Transmission rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 bps Synchronization system Asynchronous start stop system Transmission method Half duplex Maximum length of MS 500 m communication network LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl 3d ONILOd3 T3S 5 Inverter support loader software FRENIC Loader is support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the RS 485 communications facility The main functions include the following Easy editing of function code data Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I O monitor and multi monitor Operation of inverters on a PC screen Windows based only MA Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THOUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION for details 6 25 6 4 3 Meter options 1 Frequency meters Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminal
185. P DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on sx At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the Internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency Frequency sewed in internal Memory o ON OFF i i ON uF r benminal x command ON 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command Initial frequency for UP D
186. Resistance 100s supply Inverter type Q voltage Q Discharging Braking Allowable Dut Type Qty capability time average 96 ED kWs s loss kW FRNO 1E1S 20 90 0 037 37 FRNO 2E1S 20 9 DBO 75 2 100 FRNO 4E1S 20 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1S 20 17 45 0 068 18 FRNI SEIS 2LI 34 0 075 10 arn DB2 2 2 40 phase FRN2 2E18 20 33 30 0 077 7 200 V FRN3 7EIS 2L DB3 7 2 33 37 n 0 093 FRNS 5E1S 200 DB5 5 2 20 55 0 138 FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRNIIEIS 20 DBII 2 10 55 10 0 275 FRNISEIS 2L DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNO 4E1S 40 9 0 044 22 DBO 75 4 200 FRNO 75E1S 40 17 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1S 40 1 34 0 075 10 DB2 2 4 160 FRN2 2E1S 40 33 30 0 077 7 Three FRN3 7E18 40 phase DB3 7 4 130 37 0 093 400 V FRN4 0E1S 4E 20 FRNS 5E1S 40 DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 5 FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 FRNIIEIS 4L DBII 4 40 55 10 0 275 FRNISEIS 4L DB15 4 34 4 75 0 375 FRNO 1E1S 70 FRNO 2E1S 70 9 2 ae Single DB0 75 2 100 phase FRNO 4E1S 70 0 044 22 200 V FRNO0 75E1S 70 17 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1S 70 34 0 075 10 DB2 2 2 40 FRN2 2E1S 70 33 30 0 077 7 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 9 40 9 2 Overview of Function Codes
187. S3009 NOILONNA Reference frequency i Gain C32 C37 or C42 Point B Bias F18 Point A inal input D Bias Gain 100 base basa cent point CSD C34 C38 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 10096 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 van Paint B Bias 190 ae PA Analog input D Teror AO 100 Bias Gain basa baso poi C50 palm C34 Point A To set the reference frequency to O Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale set the gain base point to 5096 C34 50 foie The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P115 series FVR E11S series etc 9 2 Overview of Function Codes E Inthe case of bipolar input Terminal 12 with C35 0 Setting C35 to 0 enables terminal 12 to be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V When both F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point are set to 0 th
188. The characteristic factors l through a3 as well as their corresponding output frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 76 fo Base frequency i Even if the specified base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fo 60 Hz Output frequency fo Hz 0 f2 fa fb Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 or 4 Nominal Thermal time Output current Output frequency for Characteristic factor applied constant t for setting the motor characteristic factor 96 motor Factory thermal time kW default constant Imax f2 f3 a2 0 1 to 0 75 1 5 to 3 7 Rated current 5 5 to 11 x 150 18 5 22 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Nominal Thermal time Output current Output frequency for Characteristic factor applied constant t for setting the motor characteristic factor 96 motor Factory thermal time kW default constant Imax a2 Base Base 0 1 to 22 Roles caren frequency frequency x 150 x 33 x 33 E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In g
189. This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Multi s configuration with them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Contents 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Multi essere concen ENE Se VTR SER Aiet nennen nennen enne 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals esee eene nee enne en enne nennen trennen 6 2 6 2 Recommended wires sx POPE PO ente eme ee teli te Ri e c cerae RES 6 4 6 3 Peripheral Equipment i icc einer to Dated ed e eo exa eroe ree et 6 8 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and magnetic contactor MCJ nese penea ee e A EEE EE EEEE e E E ERES 6 8 l2 Surge aller is 6 12 BBN Arfesters ini A A BR 6 12 4 Surp e absorber sidente Ea S tilda 6 13 6 4 gt Selecting Options etm emo AU ee hoe did e i se eb iia eet 6 14 64 1 Penph rabequipmentoptions 2 25 on Pelei D bet ipd 6 14 EBBSEESDCNUPECGQUEORRLUOM 6 14 2 DG reactors DCRS nee em cemeterio e acd dec etc pe d ee 6 17 3 AC reactors ACRS cicle des 6 19 4 Output circuit filters OFLs esessessssessseseeeeeenenene nennen nter trennen tenen 6 20 5 Zero phase reactor for reducing radio noise ACL sss 6 22 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications essere ener ener entren nennen nein 6 23 1 External potentiometer for
190. USER S MANUAL UL us LISTED C MEH457 High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi User s Manual Copyright O 2006 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC Multi series of inverters including its operating procedure operation modes and selection of peripheral equipment Carefully read this manual for proper use Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and or related equipment from operating correctly shorten their lives or cause problems The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Multi Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary Name Material No Description Product scope features specifications external Catalog METRE drawings and options of the product Acceptance inspection mounting amp wiring of the i E j inverter operation using the keypad running the motor NE SHITE for a test troubleshooting and maintenance and inspection Instruction Manual The materials are subjec
191. V 400 V 50 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard model at full load 100 An AC reactor ACR is not connected 6 4 Selecting Options 3 AC reactors ACRs Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power for example in DC link bus operation shared PN operation Generally ACRs are used for correction of voltage waveform and power factor or for power supply matching but not for suppressing harmonic components in the power lines For suppressing harmonic components use a DCR An ACR should be also used when the power supply is extremely unstable for example when the power supply involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance AC reactor Magnetic contactor Inverter 9 deyo With overcurrent protection Figure 6 10 External View of AC Reactor ACR and Connection Example Table 6 10 AC Reactor ACR Nominal applied motor Inverter type kw AC reactor ACR Rated current Reactance mQ phase Generated loss LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOQ3 T3S w 01 rRNO 1E1S 2H 2 5 ACR2 0 4A 3 917 1100 5 D 12 27 30 43 D ES beams pee om oe 1 7 z 27 40 46 e E 16 23 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note 1 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K dependin
192. X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following ar a p s Bo a Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Programmable X ircui Programmable eR ad lt gt logic controller Control circuit X lt Control circuit gt logic controller PLC C PLC La SINK SINKI I Sw1 sw SOURCE SOURCE 3 1 X1 to XS X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 8 6 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 8 3 Terminal Specifications Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals Functions I eae 2 2 8 O FM Analog monitor The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V is output FMA function You can select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function
193. actual calculation Therefore calculate the motor current I from the load torque t using the following equation 7 16 Then calculate the equivalent current Ieq 2 I 5 x ur Imoo A 7 16 Where 1 is the load torque lt100 is the torque current and 15199 is exciting current 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 4 Selection procedure The following three requirements must be satisfied simultaneously 1 The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors To use the maximum braking torque exceeding values in those tables select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity 2 The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging capability kWs listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor 3 The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not exceed the average loss kW listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors 7 2 2 Notes on selection The braking time Tj cyclic period To and duty cycle ED are converted under deceleration braking conditions based on the rated torque as shown below However you do not need to consider these values when selecting the
194. ad Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F09 Torque Boost 1 A13 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Refer to the descriptions of function code F09 Stop Frequency Holding time F25 Stop Frequency Refer to the description of function code F25 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for driving E16 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for driving Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for braking E17 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter F40 E16 and the braking torque limiter F41 E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque To switch the inverter s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 F40 F41 C Tip and torque limiter 2 E16 E17 use the terminal command TL2 TLI assigned to a digital input terminal Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 singe The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both E Note no are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Control Mode Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions A14 Control Mode Selection 2
195. ader through the optional RS 485 communications port RS 485 Communications Card option For details refer to the RS 485 Communications Card OPC EI RS Installation Manual INR SIA7 1089 TI For more details through Section 5 1 5 refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b 5 5 5 2 1 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS 485 communications link It allows you to remotely run or stop the inverter edit set or manage the function codes monitor key parameters and values during operation as well as monitor the running status including alarm information of the inverters on the RS 485 communications network For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Name of software Specifications Specifications White on black indicates factory default FRENIC Loader Ver 4 0 0 0 or later Remarks Supported inverter FRENIC Multi series FRENIC Eco series FRENIC Mini series Note 1 No of supported inverters Up to 31 Recommended cable 10BASE T cable with RJ 45 connectors compliant with EIA568 CPU Intel Pentium III 600 MHz or later Note 2 OS Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Memory 32 MB or more RAM 64 MB or more is recommended Hard disk 5 MB or more free space COM port a o E g O B gt o on g 3 g PN O 2 e
196. age current radiated from the inverter and motors enters shielded telephone cables causing noise Measures It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter 3 Effect on proximity switches gt kej Phenomenon If an inverter operates proximity switches capacitance type may malfunction E Probable cause The capacitance type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity Measures It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the power supply treatment of the proximity switches The proximity switches can be replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic types 4 Effect on pressure sensors Phenomenon If an inverter operates pressure sensors may malfunction Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line Measures It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to change the wiring 5 Effect on position detectors pulse encoders Phenomenon If an inverter operates pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift the stop position of a machine Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power lines are bundled together Measure The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by separating the PG signal lines and power line
197. alculate the deceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 11 to calculate the deceleration time in the same way as for the acceleration time If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the requested time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Load tongue rn Load torque et 4 coralant speed Ti To Speed e D d re na o gt s Load torque at coralani speed Minimum decaleration Eu o am m Lod torque oa E Minimum deceleration torque 1 Fi Motor output 100148 Fu J Moinr cubpul inrque Tu Figure 7 5 Example Study of Minimum Figure 7 6 Example Study of Minimum Deceleration Torque 1 Deceleration Torque 2 Braking resistor rating For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle 1 When the periodic duty cycle is shorter than 100 sec Calculate the average loss to determine rated values 2 When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or longer The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking capacity The allowable values are listed in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors Motor RMS current For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 4 In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control highly frequent running for a short time is repeated In this ca
198. amming mode Power CN Runistep of motor Er Lal codes esser running States Manor of varias inverter staia Presa these kaye IF n sann has nccunad 5 1 The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function code E48 2 Applicable only when PID control is active JO1 1 2 or 3 3 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 4 Applicable only when the full menu mode is selected E52 2 Figure 3 2 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode in which you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency and output current 2 Configure the reference frequency and other settings 3 Run stop the motor and 4 Jog inch the motor e deyo 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned on the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the key to switch between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the 5 key refer to Monitor of running status in the Running mode in Figure 3 2 Table 3 1 Monitoring Items Display sample on LED indicator the LED E on O off monitor 1 Function Unit Meaning of displayed va
199. and USB ports To connect a FRENIC Multi inverter to a PC therefore you need to use an RS 232C RS 485 communications level converter or a USB RS 485 interface converter For correct running of the communications facility to support FRENIC Multi series of inverters be sure to use one of the recommended converters listed below Recommended converters KS 485PTI RS 232C RS 485 communications level converter USB 485I RJ45 T4P USB RS 485 interface converter Supplied by SYSTEM SACOM Corporation G deyo 2 Requirements for the cable Use an off the shelf 10BASE T LAN cable ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type fioe The RJ 45 connector has power source pins pins 1 2 7 and 8 exclusively assigned for keypads When connecting other devices to the RJ 45 connector take care not to use those pins Failure to do so may cause a short circuit hazard 3 Multi drop adapter To connect a FRENIC Multi inverter to a network in a multi drop configuration with a LAN cable that has RJ 45 as the communications connector use a multi drop adapter for the RJ 45 connector Recommended multi drop adapter Model MS8 BA JJJ made by SK KOHKI Co Ltd NOLLVOINPIININOO S87 SH HONOYHL BNINNNE 4 RS 485 Communications Card To equip your inverter with another RS 485 communications port in addition to the standard RS 485 communications port you need to install this optional card Note that you cannot use FRENIC Lo
200. ands for pressing the key while holding down the key Table 2 3 Simultaneous Keying Operation mode Simultaneous keying Used to mo Les keys Change certain function code data Refer to codes F00 i H03 H45 and H97 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Programming mode mri v keys Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms Alarm mode vor 30 keys A currently occurred c deyo SNOILONf143 ANY S3IAVN SLYVd Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status configure function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data The keypad is available in two types standard keypad and optional multi function keypad For the instructions on how to operate the multi function keypad refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Contents 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes ot ac een dete eee p hein reete tre et 3 1 3 2 sRumming Mode i negate Ota b dtata b ER d ata sities 3 3 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status sese neen tenen trennen etre nn none E nete nennen enne 3 3 3 22 Setting up frequency and PID commands esses eene eene nennen enne eene nennen 3 4 3 2 3 Running stoppine the Mot vous lidad p ceive ete dee re
201. applied Inverter type Filter type Overload poet allowable frequency capability input voltage motor range Hz kHz voltage FRNO 1E1S 20 FRNO 2E1S 20 OFL 0 4 2 FRNO 4E1S 20 FRNO 75E1S 20 OFL 1 5 2 o Three FRN1 5E1S 20 TEE Tor Three phase phase FRN2 2E1S 2BH M 20010240 V 8to 15 400 200 V FRNS 7E1S 20 Orb 3 72 200 for 0 5 50 60 Hz sec FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN11E18 2D lor 45 9 ERN15E15 20 E FRNO 4E1S 40 OFL 0 4 4 E FRNO 75E1S 40 FRN1 5E15 40 154 FRN2 2E1S 40 150 for 1 Three i Three phase s FRN3 7E1S 40 OFL 3 7 4 min phase FRN4 0E1S 4E 200 for 0 5 380 t0 440 V 8to15 400 V 50 60 Hz FRN5 5E1S 40 OFL 7 5 4 sec z FRN7 5E1S 40 1 FRN11E1S 40 OFL 15 4 FRN15E1S 40 E FRNO 4E1S 40 OFL 0 4 4A FRNO 75E1S 40 FRN15E18 40 774 i FRN2 2E1S 40 150 for 1 Three FRN3 7E1S AF OFL 3 7 4A riis Three phase phase FRN4 OE1S 4E 200 for 0 5 380 to 480 V 0 75 to 15 400 V i Tor 50 60 Hz FRN5 5E1S 40 OFL 7 5 4A sec E FRN7 5E1S 40 i FRN11E1S 40 OFL 15 4A FRN15E1S 40 1 FRNO4E 18 700 Bie 2 FRNo2E1SzH OFL 0 4 2 180 for1 rhee phase phase FERNVACIS TO Iu 38010480 V 8 to 15 400 ee FRNO 75E18 70 oc 6 0 200 for 0 5 5o60 Hz 5 FRNI 5E1S 7H sec 2 FRN2 2E15 70 OFL 372 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU OFL 7 5 2 400 400 Note 1 A box Ll in the above table replace
202. aracteristics Torque boost 1 0 Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 0 Variable torque load 2 Proportional torque There is no pattern equivalent to the FVR E11S s proportional torque Selecting the constant torque is recommended 3 to 31 Constant torque F09 Torque boost 1 H50 Non linear V f pattern Frequency Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix H51 Non linear V f pattern Voltage Electronic thermal O L relay for motor 1 Select 0 Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 1 Active for standard motor 2 Active for inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Select motor characteristics 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven fan 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with forced cooling fan Electronic thermal O L relay for motor 1 Level 20 to 13596 of the rated current of the inverter Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 20 to 135 Electronic thermal O L relay for motor 1 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 min Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 0 min Electronic thermal O L relay for braking resistor D
203. arm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not m Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 m Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 m Current detected and Current detected 2 ID and ID2 Function code data 37 38 The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detectio
204. arm er 8 Trip with alarm er 8 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm er 8 If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run 0 0 to 60 0s 3 19200 bps 9600 4800 2400 2 1 0 0 8 bits 1 7 bits 0 None 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 1 1 bit 0 2 bits 0 No detection 1to60s 0 00 to 1 00 s Maximum temperature of heat sink Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Maximum temperature of heat sink Refer to Menu 5_03 Maximum effective current Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Maximum effective output current Refer to Menu 5 04 Main circuit capacitor lifetime Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor Refer to Menu 5_05 Cooling fan accumulated operation time Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Cumulative run time of cooling fan Refer to Menu 5 07 Inverter ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Inverter ROM version Refer to Menu 45 14 Keypad panel ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Keypad panel ROM version Refer to Menu 5_16 Option ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad A 45 Option ROM version R
205. arning OH 30 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 37 1037 Current detected ID 1038 Current detected 2 ID2 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1080 1081 1082 Reserved for particular manufacturers 1099 Alarm output for any alarm 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped m Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 m Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the
206. ata 200 V series 400 V series Inactive Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for braking resistor Discharging capability 999 Disable Active External braking resistor DBLILI 4C Active External braking resistor DBLILI 2C resistor f Active _ External braking resistor External braking DBOD 4C resistor DBLILI 2C A 38 Electronic thermal overload protection for braking resistor Discharging capability Allowable average loss Functionally equivalent to the FVR E11S s function code However the setting procedure is different so make the setting appropriate for the applied braking resistor FVR E11S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Restart mode after momentary power failure Select 0 Inactive immediate inverter trip 1 Inactive inverter trip at recovery 3 Active Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred 4 Active Restart at the starting frequency Restart mode after momentary power failure Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Frequency
207. been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Section 3 3 3 Data Checking Drive Displays the running information required for Section Monitoring maintenance or test running 3 3 4 Displays external interface information Section I O Checking 3 3 5 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including Section Information cumulative run time 3 3 6 Displays the latest four alarm codes You can refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred Section 3 3 7 Alarm Information Note 1 Mounting a multi function keypad adds the data copying function to the menu enabling reading writing and verifying of function code data Note 2 The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option 3 3 Programming Mode Figure 3 3 illustrates the menu driven function code system in Programming mode Power ON Programming mode iManu drivwen Data Setting O m gt O Z c 9 z o I m A m lt U 2 o Menu 3 E MO Checking Maintenance Info Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Programming Mode Bi Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three dis
208. beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur i Note Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing 7 FIS data specifying a frequency limiter high Base Frequency 1 H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency A02 Base Frequency 2 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Voltage A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H52 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Voltage A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power m Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor m Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05
209. cally attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays Overcurrent protection Oc Z OC2 or OC3 Motor overheated 0h4 Overvoltage protection 041 OU2 or OU3 Motor overloaded 0 1 or 0 2 Heat sink overheated Oh1 Inverter overloaded Olu m Number of reset times H04 H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated J WARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset
210. cations Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency link selection E43 F01 S32 SS1 operation JO1 LE Pressing 4 keys controls OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command Manual speed frequency command set by keypad ON PID disabled OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command Other than the above Manual speed frequency command currently selected ON PID disabled LE xig 4 FM 0 Vk Hag Manual spaad command i ES E trom keypad i 552 581 OFF i je PID disabled am pugo setting oiher 2 Hz PID ON T than abov AE i a D 4 Command va link i 0 Final frequency command Multi frequengey o c mrnand PID output as frequency command 3 6 3 2 Running Mode E Settings under PID dancer control To enable the PID dancer control you need to set function code JO1 to 3 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from those under the regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 the item accessible is the primary frequency command if it is set to any other data it is the PID dancer position command Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block e deyo Setting the PID dancer position command with the and keys 1 Set functio
211. cessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P06 Motor 1 No load current P07 Motor 1 R1 P08 Motor 1 X A26 Motor 2 Rated slip frequency For details about setting of the rated slip frequency of motor 1 refer to the descriptions of P06 to POS Motor 1 Selection A39 Motor 2 Selection P99 specifies the motor to be used Data for P99 Motor type Motor characteristics O Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete P03 P06 P07 and POS data and the old related internal data are automatically updated For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type e P99 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuj
212. circuit board power PCB interface printed circuit board interface PCB or option card or short circuit between terminals 13 and 11 is detected Mock alarm Simulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence err Yes Not applicable g deu SNOI VOIJIO3dS Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and details of each function code Contents OL Function Code Tables eR HERO ERES TURAE IE EE UXRE ERR CERE ERE RE RESET 9 9 2 Overview of Function Codes coooconocccononononoconnnonnncconnnonn nono R rnne ene en reset nn no rese tenet EPEa teaser rni Enp 9 14 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions 0 cccccccccsscesscecsssceescecsseceseeceseeeeseeceseeeesseceseeeeseeceeeeeesseceeeeesaeenes 9 14 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions cccccccccssscesscecssscesscecsseeeseecsseeeesseceseeesseeceeeeesseceeeeeeaeenes 9 43 9 2 3 C codes Control functions nro teret nnn ARAM 9 70 9 2 4 P codes Motor 1 parameter 9 77 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions eese eene nete nennen nre enne 9 80 9 2 6 Acodes Motor 2 parameters oooooconnnononccnonononcnnonnnonncononnnonnnononn crono entes ettet nnne teet E teet tenen tenete nen 9 102 9 27 J ic des Apph ation functi ris e en ie plat tenens 9 104 9 2 8 y codes Link functions cesserit rere epe et de iege ene ete Pe eee hu unde Re
213. city 0 With 1 rank higher capacity Motor 1 0 01 to 11 00 kw 1 With same rank Rated 549 2 With 1 rank lower capacity poz capacity 3 With 2 ranks lower capacity F71 Motor 1 0 00 to 99 9 A P03 Motor 1 0 00 to 100 0A Rated current Rated current Motor 1 0 00 to 99 9 A Motor 1 0 00 to 50 00 A F72 No load P06 No load current current F73 Motor 2 0 00 to 99 9 A M7 Motor 2 0 00 to 100 0A Rated current Rated current Tuning 0 Inactive Motor 2 0 Disable 1 Active Auto tuning 1 Enable E AIB Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Motor 1 0 00 to 50 00 Motor 1 2 F75 R1 P07 96 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Motor 1 0 00 to 50 00 Motor 1 E F76 X P08 X 0 00 to 50 00 Torque limit 0 to 999 response x At constant speed Torque limit 0 to 999 response F78 At acceleration deceleration A 36 FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi F Fundamental functions FVR E11S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Data protection 0 Data change enable 1 Data protection Data protection Disable data protection and digital reference protection Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Frequency command 1 0 Keypad operation UP DOWN keys Frequency command 1 UP DOWN keys on keypad 1 Voltage input Terminal 12 Frequency command 1
214. code F31 Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation Output frequency 2 After slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV Analog output Input impedance of external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable to drive up to two meters with 10kQ impedance Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 g deu Pulse monitor Pulse signal is output You can select FMP function with the FMP function slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ SNOILVOIJIO3dS Pulse duty Approx 5096 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Voltage waveform Pulse output waveform Pulse output L m FM output circuit 15 1 085 11 Analog common Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY m gt a 3 o H Q S n a g S E Transistor output 1 Transistor output 2 Functions 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and
215. code data so it does not protect the frequency settings or PID speed command specified by the and keys m Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with this command the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi frequency keypad analog input etc 72777 OFF Enable PID control ON Disable PID control Enable manual settings m Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency command To select the inverse operation turn the IVS ON Output frequency 100 T Normal omy A 10 Analog input voltage d m 20 m Analog input current The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by this IVS terminal command lal 9 2 Overview of Function Codes When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 and C1 Switching normal inverse operation can apply only
216. commended capacity If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other Installing an MC purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped in v ron before you turn the MC on or off TET Remove a surge killer integrated with the magnetic contactor in the inverter s output secondary circuit Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit on or off Installing an MC more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result in the primary I i D citc it If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use terminal FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key The electronic thermal feature of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant Protecting the Combina motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a tion with high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This peripheral may cause the thermal relay to trip at a current lower than the set value If devices this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Discontinuance of power factor correcting capacitor Do not connect power factor correcting capacitors to the inverter
217. connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors with series connected brake coils Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation Synchronous motors Itis necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under Environ certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable Installation mental es material such as metal conditions Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 8 Section 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or Installing an residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit MCCB or breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of each RCD ELCB inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the re
218. cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled but the fan does not run Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Number of startups Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to O and the count will start again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor s resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 LED Monitor shows Table 3 18 Display Items for Maintenance Information continued Input watt hour data Description Shows the value expressed by input watt hour KWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9999 Unit None D
219. cted item appears 5 Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the 55 key again to return to the menu LED monitor shows 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 10 Drive Monitor Display Items Description 3 00 Output Hz Output frequency before slip compensation frequency 3 07 Output Hz Output frequency after slip compensation frequency 3 02 Output current A Output current 3 03 Output voltage V Output voltage 3 04 Calculated Calculated output torque of the motor in torque 3 05 Reference Hz Frequency specified by a frequency command frequency Rotational N A Rotational direction being outputted 3 06 Ep direction f forward f reverse stop 3 07 Running status N A Running status in hexadecimal format Refer to BB Displaying running status on the next page Motor speed r min Display value Output frequency Hz x 120 3 08 ne ne 1 y H2 Function code PO1 For motor 2 read PO1 as A15 Load shaft speed r min Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code ESO or m min 3 09 Line speed The 7 segment letters 7 appear for 10000 r min or more If J appear decrease function code ESO data so that the LED monitor displays 9999 or below referring to the above equation PID command N A Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command usin
220. ction 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad For details on keying operation and function code setting refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists five LED indicators of a four digit LED monitor six keys and The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor monitor running status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the function code data monitor I O signal states maintenance information and alarm information LED Monitor LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators 7 segment LED monitor LED indicators Program Reset key Function Data key UP key DOWN key Figure 2 3 Keypad Table 2 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Functions Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency current and voltage Menus function codes and their data Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated In Programming mode In Alarm mode Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm
221. culate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load systems 1 Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder The moment of inertia J kg m around the hollow cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows where the outer and inner diameters are D and D m and total mass is W kg in Figure 7 8 We D D 8 For a similar shape a solid cylinder calculate the moment of inertia as Dis 0 J 2 kg m 7 8 P m Ds m Figure 7 8 Hollow Cylinder 2 Fora general rotating body Table 7 1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the above cylindrical rotating body 7 8 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters Table 7 1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies Mass W kg Mass W kg Moment of inertia Moment of inertia J kg m J kg m Hollow cylinder b aria Ai eW A 2 Law a 12 4 J We Lo Lo Lei b axi EESTI 1 2 3 a J We L2 eD bar 3 16 1 J W Lo L Leer Square cone Pyramid rectangular base Tetrahedron with an equilateral triangular 1 2 3 2 base l cut We 5 D J We Ly els LI Main metal density at 20 C p kg m Iron 7860 Copper 8940 Aluminum 2700 7 9 deyo Sal LIOVdVO H3 LHJANI ANY HOLON TWWILdO ONILO3 T3S 3 For a load running horizontally Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figu
222. d 2 6 deyo S3009 NOILONN 4 m Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C turns ON If no M2 MI terminal command is assigned motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command Sele ted totor SWM2 status M2 MI after completion of switching OFF Motor 1 OFF ON Motor 2 ON Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2 Maximum Frequency F03 AOL Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03 Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 A10 Braking time F22 All Starting Frequency F23 Al2 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13 Control Mode Selection F42 Al4 Motor No of poles P01 A15 Rated
223. d sometimes result in damage to the insulation Countermeasures against surge voltages When driving a motor with a 400 V class inverter the following methods are countermeasures against damage to the motor insulation by the surge voltages 1 Method using motors with enhanced insulation Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved 2 Method to suppress surge voltages There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages one is to reduce the voltage rise time and another is to reduce the voltage peak value 1 Output reactor If wiring length is relatively short the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise time dv dt with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter Refer to Figure C3 1 However if the wiring length becomes long suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be difficult 2 Output filter Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to be reduced Refer to Figure C 3 2 App C Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters Fagor ifaw Le CN x Ly s Commercial i Commercial es 1 inesrier PL Motor n I Po P i wok irae BO lid n y A E paa al dto i A p TUYO 4 LJ m 4g H 4 E gt R I OU C pam Surge suppressing Hits irei 1 Output reactor 2 Output filter Figure
224. dA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO ml key disabled The motor is driven by terminal FWD or REV command Note The rotational direction of In the forward direction IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of the motor shown here In the reverse direction LL For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 3 2 4 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor 1 Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display 0g Enter Running mode see page 3 2 and press the 5 i keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to Og again Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration deceleration time respectively Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with your needs SUL Tp Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the 5 9 keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped 2 Jogging the motor Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key 3 Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 59 keys simultaneously F
225. de continued Code C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C41 C42 C43 C44 C50 C51 C52 C53 Code P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P99 Name Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset Gain Filter time constant Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point No of poles Rated capacity Rated current Auto tuning Online tuning No load current Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time Slip compensation gain for braking Rated slip frequency Motor 1 Selection A o 3 n o o o o 3 m o o o o o o 3 a o o o o o 3 o o o o 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar o o o 3 N o o o o o o o 3 N o o o o Data setting range el o 3 e o E 9 e e ol 3 3 Sl sl o eI e o o Data setting range 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 0 00 to 100 0 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running 0 Disable Enable 0 00 to 50 00 0 0
226. des W Connecting Programmable Logic Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 or Y2 Figure 8 8 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output Photocoupler Control circuit prada Control circuit Bis un logic controller logic controller Current Photocoupler Current MAC AA nom 35V 1 lL S CMY SOURCE input AA a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 8 8 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit Relay output 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function output has been activated to stop the motor for any error Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 and Y2 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Between terminals 30A and 30C is closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Between terminals 30A and 30C is open non excited for ON signal out
227. ding to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop m2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time oo The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current s limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppr
228. ding to operation specified by J65 Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper m Detection value J63 J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored Data for J63 Detection value Output torque Description To improve the accuracy of torque calculation be sure to auto tune the inverter for the applied motor This setting covers the driving torque only Output current m Detection level J64 The no load current to the motor always flows Specify J64 Detection level correctly considering the no load current of the applied motor J64 specifies the detection level putting the rated torque and current of the motor as 100 9 115 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Mode selection J65 J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64 Data for J65 Description Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function The inverter decelerate to stops the motor by the specified deceleration time Decelerate to stop The inverter shuts down the output immediately and the oast to a sto c P motor coast to stops The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit operation and is controlling the output current to keep the hold toque until the run comma
229. e 0 00 to 1 00 s Hosil equipment Quen Response Inverter TH T1 Latency time a where a is the processing time inside the inverter This time may vary depending on the processing status and the command processed in the inverter LO For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b fune When setting the inverter with FRENIC Loader pay sufficient attention to the performance and or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as RS 485 RS 232C communications level converter Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status and switch the send receive of transmission data by a timer m Protocol selection y10 y10 specifies the communications protocol Data for y10 Protocol for the standard RS 485 port Specifying FRENIC loader to connect to the inverter can only be made by y10 FRENIC Loader protocol Select FRENIC Loader y10 1 Modbus RTU protocol Fuji general purpose inverter protocol m Protocol selection y20 y20 specifies the communications protocol Data for y20 for the optional communications port Modbus RTU protocol Fuji general purpose inverter protocol 9 122 9 2 Overview of Function Codes y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection H30 Communications Link Function Mode selection y99 For setting data for y98 bus link function Mode selection refer to the description of function code H30 Loader Link Function
230. e AN ere AIC MW IL tiec me i run time Ay 10 5 Di cun DC link bus A z voltage i l I i 1 I I I I I 1 1 i I i i 5 og nm Option s FPEM H 42 ROM version iz zr 5 gt namon Cumulative run oly LIE time of the motor Figure 3 9 Menu Transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 2 3 4 5 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the and keys to display Maintenance Information che Press the l key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5 00 Use the and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the 5x key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears Press the ss key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the key again to return to the menu 3 26 LED Monitor shows 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 18 Display Items for Maintenance Information Cumulative run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time
231. e Delay time HO9 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and every normal startup The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Frequency DOME ea m mnn o o DOM GU UR UR OG ee Hs Motor speed J d Max 1 2 mec i ding motor sperd pm lt A L I MEA iD imaj lam i L i i l ipeum i E Auto search for idling motor speed to follow m H09 and STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of H09 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data for
232. e overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter of the 999 current limit control block shown in Figure 4 3 1 in Section 4 4 The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter d Note H the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows If H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz
233. e Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar Cm T 2 Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter 3 Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been activated 6 8 6 3 Peripheral Equipment Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power supply Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 6 1 which are the most critical RMS currents for using the inverter Refer to Table 6 4 For switching the motor drive source between the inverter output and commercial power lines use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the commercial line side 1 2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers Figure 6 2 shows a connection example for MCCB or ELCB with overcurrent protection in the inverter input circuit Table 6 4 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter models Table 6 5 lists the applicable grades of ELCB sensitivity A WARNING Insert an MCCB or ELCB with overcurrent protection recommend
234. e RJ 45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC Multi series is different from that on the FVR E11S series Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR EI11S series of inverter Doing so could damage the internal control circuit 8 3 Terminal Specifications Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 8 10 To access the slide switches remove the terminal cover and keypad For details on how to remove the terminal cover refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SI47 1094 E Chapter 2 Section 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover and Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks Figure 1 4 Table 8 1 lists the function of each slide switch Table 8 1 Function of Each Slide Switch Slide Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SWI to the SOURCE position Factory default SINK Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF
235. e effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the 15 key If you press the Sx key without pressing the ss key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation 6 deu Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with and keys the change will not take effect Pressing the x key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible S3009 NOILONNA B Copying data The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters The standard keypad does not support this feature The optional multi function keypad supports it with Menu 8 in Programming mode If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The f
236. e filter c LC filter zero phase reactor Figure A 10 Various Filters and their Connection 4 Noise prevention measures at the receiving side It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices The following treatments are also implemented 1 Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals of the signal circuit in parallel 2 Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or passing signal lines through ferrite core beads It is also effective to widen the signal base lines 0 V line or grounding lines 5 Other The level of generating propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter The higher the carrier frequency the higher the noise level In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under driving conditions 3 Noise prevention examples Table A 2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter 1 AM radio 2 AM radio Table A 2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measure
237. e has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones An option card or multi function keypad is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit number Select life Lower the Function Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Detect output phase loss Detect input phase loss carrier frequency automatically Data 0 Disable Use the factory default Disable Disable Disable Data 1 Enable Use the user setting Enable Enable Enable Example of decimal expression 19 Enable 1 Use the factory default 0 9 100 Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Conversion table Decimal to from binary Decimal SI Decimal SHY Bit4 Bit3 Bit2
238. e idling poni motor speed When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled F14 4 or 5 and the allowable momentary power failure time specified H16 turning a run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL LILILI 2 and 4 in the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL OOO DA instead 9 89 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2 Note Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops accor
239. e negative and positive voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below Reference freguency Ww C32 Point B ADV Terminal 12 Gain 10y input base point 034 AA Configuring F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point to specify an arbitrary value Points A1 A2 and A3 gives the bias as shown below Reference frequency Terminal 12 inpul 6 deyo S3009 NOILONNA PEL DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency H95 DC Braking Braking response mode A09 DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency DC Braking 1 Braking level A10 DC Braking 2 Braking level DC Braking 1 Braking time A11 DC Braking 2 Braking time F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning off the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking m Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state m Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output cur
240. e selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Note If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default 9 2 Overview of Function Codes B V f characteristics The FRENIC Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V Rated voltage Rated voltage 10096 100 Torque Output Torque Output boost to aa boost P i frequency Base A Base Hz requency frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern y IS Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequenc
241. ecelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of Oh or O u respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control Hate In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled 9 97 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque ate This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti
242. eceleration Time 2 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start E16 Torque Limiter 2 9 37 Limiting level for driving Di 9 55 E17 Limiting level for braking E20 Terminal Y1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 9 55 terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C as listed below E21 Terminal Y2 Function 0 1000 Inverter running E27 Terminal 30A B C Function 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal 2 1002 Frequency detected 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 1004 Torque polarity detected 1005 Inverter output limiting 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure Motor overload early warning S3009 NOILONNA 7 1007 OL 10 1010 Inverter ready to run 21 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay 26 1026 Auto resetting 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early waming OH 30 1030 Service lifetime alarm 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 35 1035 Inverter output on 36 1036 Overload prevention control 37 Current detected D 38 Current detected 2 42 PID alarm 49 Switched to motor 2 57 1057 Brake signal 80 1080 Reserved 2 81 1081 Reserved 2 82 1082 Reserved 2 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal These func
243. ed 9 119 9 1 Function Code Tables 9 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Multi series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into nine groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 Parameters A codes Application Functions J codes Link Functions y codes and Option Functions o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 9 3 and subsequent pages B Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with t and keys the change will immediately tak
244. ed for each inverter for its input circuits Do not use an MCCB or ELCB of a higher rating than that recommended Doing so could result in a fire DiE Molded case circuit breaker earth leakage circuit breaker Magnetic contactor Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or earth leakage circuit Magnetic contactor Inverter breaker ELCB Three phase power supply 200 to 230 V 50 60 Hz Figure 6 2 External Views of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Magnetic Contactor and Connection Example 6 9 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOd3 T3S Table 6 4 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Nominal MCCB ELCB Magnetic contactor type Power applied Rated current A MC1 for input circuit Magnetic contactor type supply Inverter type qme volage or EE 3E 3 MC2 for output circuit s phase 400 V 4 0 FRN4 0E1S 4E S The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and ELCBs to be used in the power control panel with an internal temperature of lower than 50 C The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient of 0 85 as the MCCBs and ELCBs original rated current is specified when using them in an ambient
245. ed on the kW rating of the motor used irrespective of the inverter type rm The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate capacity of the inverters following the guideline Note that the capacity cannot be applied to the reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the inverter input circuits LL For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment refer to the catalogs or technical documents issued from their manufacturers ddy Table B 2 Input Rated Capacities of General purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings Applicable motor rating kW n mv esr wr pe 2m er e o mv fost om iss 2 s em or n ve ats 2 Values of Ki conversion factor Depending on whether an optional ACR AC reactor or DCR DC reactor is used apply the appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline The values of the conversion factor are listed in Table B 3 Table B 3 Conversion Factors Ki for General purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors Circuit EE Conversion Main applications iex eene E a inverters y e Elevators 3 phase bridge w reactor ACR K32 1 8 capacitor w reactor DCR K33 1 8 Refrigerators air smoothing conditioning systems w reactors ACR and DCR K34 1 4 Other general appliances d Nota Some models are equipped with a reactor as a standard accessory 2 Calc
246. ed over the previous inverter improving speed control accuracy CPU speed comparison FRENTE Figure 1 4 B Compatible with PG feedback control Example of camer machine E iiho speed feedback operation pa erro a Liat Le A pae rene jane porton VEZ warden ca aura acuity dra h Cai E With speed feedback Improved speed control accuracy a impres camer machina positioning accuracy a Positioning time can be shortened The pend juri clone postor i s Improves measuring accuracy on a aroma gp mm ame scale Figure 1 5 1 2 1 1 Features B Tripless deceleration by automatic deceleration control deyo The inverter controls the energy level generated and the deceleration time and so deceleration stop can be accomplished without tripping due to overvoltage z m O U c O O Zz 4 O bis vols T mA 1 a Cureal a nw Z Q Time Figure 1 6 Optimum for the operations specific to vertical and horizontal conveyance B Hit and stop control is realized more easily Impacts are detected mechanically and not only can the inverter s operation pattern be set on coast to stop or deceleration stop but switching from torque limitation to current limitation and generating a holding torque hit and stop control can be selected making it easy to adjust brake application and release timing Cumt amp pUr min Antalional spam Time Figure 1 7 B Inclusion of a bra
247. edback signal does not oscillate Increase the data of JOS PID control D Differential time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Refining the system response waveforms is shown below 1 Suppressing overshoot Increase the data of J04 Integral time and decrease the data of J05 Differential time Controbed Response Natural Tene 9 110 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 2 Quick stabilizing moderate overshoot allowable Decrease the data of J03 Gain and increase that of J05 Differential time Controlled Response Halural i Tare 3 Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04 Increase the data of J04 Integral time 4 Controlled Response Natural 4 Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by JOS Differential time Decrease the data of JOS Differential time Decrease the data of JO3 Gain when the oscillation cannot be suppressed even if the differential time is set at 0 sec Controlled 6 deu Response Madural Tene S3009 NOILONNA m Feedback filter J06 J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control Data setting range 0 0 to 900 0 s This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop Setting too long a time constant makes the system response slow CN ol a To specify
248. efer to Menu 5_19 A Alternative motor parameters 2 FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Maximum frequency 2 50 to 400 Hz Maximum frequency 2 50 to 400 Hz Base frequency 2 25 to 400 Hz Base Frequency 2 25 to 400 Hz Rated voltage 2 Maximum voltage 2 OV The output voltage 200 V series in proportion to the 80 to 240 V power supply voltage is 400 V series set 160 to 480 V 200 V series 80 to 240 V 400 V series 160 to 480 V Rated voltage at base frequency 2 Maximum output voltage 2 80 to 240 V for OV Output a voltage in 200 V class series proportion to input voltage 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series 80 to 240V for 200 V class series 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series Torque boost 2 0 1 2 3 to 31 Torque boost 2 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Select 0 Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 Active for 4 pole standard motor 2 Active for 4 pole inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with shaft driven fan 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated motor
249. elect ACC DEC time RTI 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 Enable external alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 MI Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID Terminal commands assigned Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE Universal DI U DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Force to stop STOP Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Hold PID integral component PID HLD Reserved Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 f Nowe Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions ss marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm
250. ency 1 7 corti F05 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor fue Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 9 20 9 2 Overview of Function Codes B Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving
251. eneral set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable 9 22 9 2 Overview of Function Codes B Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory default Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code O 7 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics 0n A7 w 1 F 1 1 1 Driving time of motor min uem ee 0 50 100 150 200 Actual Output Cu
252. ensor may malfunction due to noise that came from the box body through the shielded wire Erroneous pulse outputs from a pulse converter caused a shift in the stop position of a crane Poorer 1 inem aul L r ME Cor n chis I f corner H Pubs peer Possible cause Erroneous pulses may be outputted by induction noise since the power line of the motor and the signal line of the PG are bundled together The PLC program sometimes malfunctions PLG Her Power Supply lt Possible cause gt Since the power supply system is the same for the PLC and inverter it is considered that noise enters the PLC through the power supply A 11 Noise prevention measures 1 Install an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Connect the shield of the shielded wire of the pressure sensor to the O V line common of the pressure sensor changing the original connection 4 vl ri nunply pupil 4 Pre arr E i Circus won 1 Install an LC filter and a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter 1 Install a capacitive filter and an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter on the output side of the inverter 3 Lower the carrier frequency of the inverter LL hter LE filer Inve 1 fw ULT YU i fi Caci ier 1 The shielded parts of shield wires for
253. ent so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 9 24 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command off In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary powe
254. equency SS8 Select ACC DEC time RTT Enable 3 wire operation HLD Coast to a stop BX Reset alarm RST Enable external alarm trip THR Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 UP Increase output frequency UP DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Hz PID Switch normal inverse operation IVS Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE RS 485 standard Bus option 25 Universal DI U DI Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Acceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration time 2 Torque limiter 2 Driving Braking 20 to 20096 999 No limit Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving 20 to 20096 999 Disable 0926 Automatic deceleration control Automatic deceleration Mode selection 0 Disable 20 to 20096 999 No limit Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking 20 to 20096 999 Disable Y1 terminal function Function Y2 terminal function 0 Inverter running RUN 1 Frequency equivalence signal FAR 2 Frequency level detection FDT 3 Undervoltage detection signal LU 4 Torque polarity B D 5 Torque limiting TL 6 7 Auto resetting IPF Overload early warning OL 8 Lifetime alarm main circuit capacitor LI
255. er flows into the stray capacitance between each phase wire Ensure that the and motor wiring is shorter than 50 m If this length must be exceeded lower the Wiring carrier frequency or install an output circuit filter OFL DE Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or Wire size AC recommended wire size 3 Do not share one multi core cable in order to connect several inverters with Wire type motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor ratings listed in m the standard specifications table for the inverter Driving general purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration Selecting motor is required select an inverter with one rank larger capacity than the Inverter standard Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters capacity for details Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current Motor rated current Transpor When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations that meet the tation and environmental conditions listed in the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SIA7 1094 E storage Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment How this manual is organized This manual contains Chapters 1 through 9 Appendices and Glossary
256. erage loss KW HA x Motor rating kW 4 When the motor decelerates apply expressions 1 and 3 and when it runs at a constant speed expressions 2 and 4 The obtained data differs depending upon the motor s running state 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Ko 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions Terminal X1 Function E98 Terminal FWD Function Terminal X2 Function E99 Terminal REV Function Terminal X3 Function Terminal X4 Function Terminal X5 Function Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON ANCAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g SS1 2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Function code data Active ON Active OFF 1000 1001 1002 1003 SS8 1004 S
257. eration Run to reverse Operation method RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse Maximum frequency 1 50 to 400 Hz Maximum frequency 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Base frequency 1 25 to 400 Hz Base frequency 1 25 0 to 400 0 Hz Rated voltage 1 0 V The output voltage 200 V series in proportion to the 80 to 240 V power supply voltage is set 400 V series 160 to 480 V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 80 to 240 V for 0 V Output a voltage 200 V class series in proportion to input voltage 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series Maximum voltage 1 200 V series 80 to 240 V 400 V series 160 to 480 V Maximum output voltage 1 80 to 240 V for 200 V class series 160 to 480 V for 400 V class series Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s A 37 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Torque boost 1 0 Automatic torque boost Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 1 Constant torque load 1 Variable torque ch
258. esistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Ratedcurrent of the motor A W X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X X V 3x1 x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Ratedcurrent of the motor A B Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Synchronous speed Rated slip frequency Hz x Base frequency Note For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving A23 Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 1 Slip compensation response time A24 Motor 2 Slip compensation response time Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking A25 Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 10096 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Ex
259. ess the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm OU When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load 9 90 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 For configuring these function codes restart time frequency fall rate and allowable momentary power failure time refer to the description of F14 Thermistor Mode selection H27 Thermistor Level These function codes specify the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm signal m Thermistor Mode selection H26 H26 selects the operation mode protection or alarm for the PTC thermistor as listed below Data for H26 Action Disable Enable When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level the motor protective function alarm 0 4 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state m Thermistor Level H27 H27 specifies the detection level expressed in voltage for the
260. etails refer to B Selecting menus to display on page 3 12 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 10 Figure 3 7 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON o CRunning mode Programming M c 11 ene Listof monitoring items Running status info P m 1 i br IE Up o mm T ECOA prs Lm vem Output frequenc i i nn E cn q y l Act L T 1 3 00 k 1 258 AA Before alip ex M Kx imr compensation E M pan ams 3 00 ll SEL Output frequency mc After slip compensation 3 00 or NET enn Torque limit value CNE A Su Level 2 Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display Drive Monitoring Zope 3 Press the 5S key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 3_ 00 4 Use the and keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the key The running status information for the sele
261. evel 150 C the inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode displays alarm 0 2 on the LED monitor and shuts down its power output Braking resissar 4 Tonrinal CM be Termal 41 through X5 FO REM External alarm tinction THR P Wneartar Figure 6 6 Braking Resistor Standard Model and Connection Example Table 6 6 Braking Resistor Standard Model P Continuous braking Repetitive braking Swar w Resistance 100 braking torque each cycle is less than 100 s supply Inverter type Type Q ty A 9 Discharging ES Average allowable Duty cycle voltage im Braking time s capability KWs loss KW ED PRNO ZEISE o i 0097 sr DB0 75 2 100 FRNO 4E1S 20 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1S 20 17 45 0 068 18 Three FRN1 5E1S 20 DB2 2 2 40 34 0 075 10 phase FRN2 2E1S 20 33 30 0 077 7 200 V FRN3 7E1S 20 DB3 7 2 33 37 20 0 093 FRN5 5E1S 20 DB5 5 2 20 55 0 138 FRN7 5E1S 20 DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRN11E1S 20 DB11 2 10 55 10 0 275 FRN15E1S 20 DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNO 4E1S 40 DB0 75 4 200 9 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1S 40 17 45 0 068 18 1 FRN1 5E1S 40 DB2 2 4 160 34 0 075 10 FRN2 2E1S 40 33 30 0 077 7 Three ERN3 7E1S 4LI ens FRN4 0E1S 4E DB3 7 4 130 37 20 0 093 FRN5 5E1S 40 DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 FRN7 5E1S 40 DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 3 FRN11E1S 40 DB11 4 40 55 10 0 2
262. f inverters it replaces A C J or K If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 5 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOQ3 T3S W If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40 C or below Table 6 3 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size mm Nominal Power applied Main circuit power input L1 R L2 S L3 T or L1 L L2 N Inverter output U V W supply motor Inverter type w DC reactor DCR w o DC reactor DCR pac voltage kW Allowable temp 1 temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 temp 1 pu Allowable temp 1 Current 60 C 75 C 90 C o eee 60 C 75 C 90 C 60 C 75 C 90 C A aereas pis usr eof a0 Preta pen 0 o 0 8 ox Jranozeisoa 20 20 20 095 25 29 20 18 20 20 20 18 os jrrnoseis 20 20 20 20 16 20 20 20 34 20 20 29 30 ors fenorseisan 20 20 zo so 20 zo 2o ss 2o 2o 20 s Three 8 0 phase T mov r pmurts2o f 2o Pao f 2o pus pis pne pus per oeo pi 17 25 rs mursesan 3s 20 20 9s eo os 35 arpss 35 20 59 ii panee ao fes as aoe pus pe 35 pr peo pa Pas a7 s frrwisers20 wo so ss sre zzo o eo 140 50 55 60 13 20 20 20 25 37 meo 2
263. f the inverter warning rated current E34 E34 Current detection EMO Level E35 Timer 0 00 to 60 0 s E35 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s Coefficient for 0 000 to 9 999 Coefficient for 0 000 to 9 999 constant constant Bey feeding rate Eaa feeding rate time time E40 Display 0 00 to 200 0 E40 PID display 0 00 to 200 0 coefficient A __ coefficient A Display 0 00 to 200 0 PID display 0 00 to 200 0 E41 S E41 i coefficient B coefficient B E42 LED display 0 0 to 5 0 s E42 LED display 0 0 to 5 0 s filter filter A 42 C Control functions FVR E11S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Jump frequency 0 to 400 Hz Hysteresis 0 to 30 Hz Jump frequency Hysteresis 0 to 400 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Multistep frequency setting 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Timer operation 0 Inactive 1 Active operation 0 Disable 1 Enable Pattern operation Stage 1 0 00 to 3600 s With C21 1 set the time with the and keys Frequency command 2 Offset Terminal 12 0 to 8 as same as those of F01 5 0 to 5 0 Terminal C1 5 0 to 5 0 Frequency command 2 Analog input adjustment for 12 Offset Analog Input adjustment for C1 Offset Refer to FVR E11S s F01 5 0 to 5 0 5 0 to 5 0
264. fe judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor A codes Motor 2 Parameters Code A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 Data setting range Maximum Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 A Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 9 99 Data Default Refer to copying setting page Table A 4 9 102 Nn v Tableara i Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Table A 4 160 to 500V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Note This setting takes effect when A13 0 1 3 or 4 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan for Motor 2 2 Foran inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Thermal time constant DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30
265. g This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque i Non In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur Starting Frequency 1 A12 Starting Frequency 2 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop Frequency F39 Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor fola If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not Output any power as long as the reference frequency d
266. g a noise filter that reduces the noise level 2 Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise and 3 Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route Table A 1 lists the noise prevention measures their goals and propagation routes Table A 1 Noise Prevention Measures Goal of noise prevention P Conduction route measures Noise prevention method Separate main circuit from control circuit Avoid parallel and bundled wiring Wiring and Use appropriate installation grounding Use shielded wire and twisted shielded wire Use shielded cable in main circuit Use metal conduit pipe Appropriate arrangement Control of devices in panel panel Metal control panel Anti noise Line filter device Insulation transformer Use a passive capacitor Measures at for control circuit Dope Use ferrite core for TeceiVing control circuit sides Line filter Separate power supply systems Lower the carrier frequency Y Effective Y Effective conditionally Blank Not effective What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration 1 Wiring and grounding As shown in Figure A 7 separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter Use shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extrane
267. g function code E40 and E41 data PID display 3 10 coefficients A and B Display value PID command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback N A Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the amount object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display 3 11 coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Torque limit Driving torque limit value based on motor rated torque 3 12 value Level 1 3 13 Torque limit Braking torque limit value based on motor rated torque value Level 2 e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VHd3dO E Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits O to 15 as listed in Table 3 11 Table 3 12 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 13 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Notation Table 3 11 Running Status Bit Assignment Content 1 when function code data is being written Notation Content 1 under voltage limiting control Always 0 1 under torque limiting control Always 0 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for r
268. g on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Note 2 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power supply is three phase 200 V 400 V 50 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard model at full load 100 6 19 4 Output circuit filters OFLs Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents from the 400 V class series of inverters Suppress leakage current due to higher harmonic components from the inverter output lines This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines Keep the length of the power feed line less than 400 m Minimize radiation and or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at plants f Nola Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Otherwise the filter will overheat Table 6 11 Output Circuit Filter OFL Carrier Nominal Inverter Power 0 frequency Maximum supply
269. g up the slide switches on page 8 17 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Speed Output fraguancy Reference frequency pop HzB Hz Dulput frequency Droop characteristics t Logd 10058 Motor nad torque man Mote To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor n za lx 5 9 92 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or field bus option allows you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or field bus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the field bus LE OFF i Selected command ro Frequency command ON Run command MGE If no LE is assigned the command source selected RS 485 communications link by H30 y98 will apply Option card Field bus
270. h them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors vi Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and details of each function code Appendices Glossary Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual je Mete This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to faull efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents E Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or 7 operations MA This icon indicates a reference to
271. hapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Multi series and the recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Contents EE BE I m 1 1 1 2 Control System eee tete EDU Te I ER EG DEET ESEESE EEEE ESTEE D 1 11 1 3 Recommended Configuration iia old ene bee ee diia desa 1 13 1 1 Features 1 1 Features deyo Environment friendly B Complies with European regulations that limit the use of specific hazardous substances RoHS These inverters are gentle on the environment Use of 6 hazardous substances is limited Products manufactured beginning in the autumn of 2005 will comply with European regulations except for interior soldering in the power module Six Hazardous Substances Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium Polybrominated biphenyl PBB Polybrominated diphenyl ether PBDE BInIN DIN3HA OL NOILONGOYLNI About RoHS The Directive 2002 95 EC promulgated by the European Parliament and European Council limits the use of specific hazardous substances included in electrical and electronic devices B Long life design The design life of each internal component with limited life has been extended to 10 years This helps to extend the maintenance cycle for your equipment
272. haracteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 8 3 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 when you assign the terminal C1 to C1 function Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded wire Control circuit Cera gone Capacitor lt Control circuit gt analog output 0 022 u F 13 50V Oy e 5 O 12 O 12 E O 1kto5k9 111 m O mi Ferrite core Em Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 8 2 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 8 3 Example of Electric Noise Reduction Digital Input Terminals Digital input Digital input 1 Run forward command Run reverse command 8 3 Terminal Specifications Functions 1 Various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment and multi frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 2 Input mode 1 e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the internal slide switch Refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in t
273. he equivalent capacity of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving voltage 50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6 6 kV Appendix B 2 1 Calculation of equivalent capacity Pi gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the guideline App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage B 2 2 Regulation The level calculated value of the harmonic current that flows from the customer s receiving point out to the system is subjected to the regulation The regulation value is proportional to the contract demand The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B 1 Appendix B 2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of the inverter for compliance to Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Table B 1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand mA kW Receiving 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over voltage 25th EA EAS IEC 3 When the regulation applied The guideline has been applied As the application the estimation for Voltage distortion factor required as the indispensable conditions when entering into the consumer s contract of electric power is already expired Compliance to the harmonic suppression for custo
274. he current operation situation The control block section which is the very brain of the inverter allows you to customize the inverter s driving patterns throughout the function code data settings Main circuit gt Converter 1 Current DC link bus detection capacitor lt Control block gt Accelerator decelerator processor Dynamic torque vector controller Frequency with flux estimator command or voltage calculator Figure 1 24 Schematic Overview Block Diagram of FRENIC Multi 1 3 Recommended Configuration 1 3 Recommended Configuration deyo To control a motor with an inverter correctly you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system to be used After selecting the rated capacities select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter then connect them to the inverter Figure 1 25 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment Three phase power supply or Single phase power supply BInIN DIN3HJ OL NOILONGOYLNI mr Molded case circuit breaker MECE Ekg or l Earth leakage circull breaker ELCB Ctra with overcurrent protection Magnetic confacior OC reactor Braking resistor Inxsuection molor Figure 1 25 Recommended Configuration Diagram Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This chapter contains exter
275. he instruction manual for each option Note S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details Figure 4 4 2 PID Process Control Block Output Stage 4 13 This page is intentionally left blank 4 5 PID Process Control Block Figures 4 4 1 and 4 4 2 show block diagrams of the PID control block input and output stages respectively when the PID process control is enabled JO1 1 or 2 The logic shown generates the drive frequency command according to the PID process command source and PID feedback source PID conditioner and the selected frequency command source for a manual speed command Additional and supplemental information is given below This logic disables settings of the frequency command 2 C30 and auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 E60 to E62 as manual frequency commands and the command loss detection switching between the normal or inverse operation The multi frequency commands 1 2 and 3 are only applicable to the manual speed command e Refer to Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block for explanations of common items For selecting analog input terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function as the PID process command source you need to set data up for function codes E61 to E62 and J02 The multi frequency command 4 C08 8 C12 and 12 C16 are only applicable to PID process command To switch the operati
276. he negative logic system and vice versa 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for FWD and REV Digital input circuit specifications Control circuit PLC 24 VDC K FAO l O ud O Photocoupler l UR ET ee 1 sw TR E i SOURCE A l O K I eU X1 to X5 ako bosse FWD REV CM Figure 8 4 Digital Input Circuit Item Min Max Operation ON level 0V 2V voltage SINK OFF level 22V 27V Operation ON level 22V 27V voltage SOURCE OFF level OV 2V Operation current at ON Input voltage is at 0 V I mA ces Allowable leakage current at OFF 7 oSm PLC PLC signal power Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum 50 mA DC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 Refer to Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals in this Section for more Digital input common Two common terminals for digital input signals These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY 8 11 g deyo SNOILVOIJIO3dS Functions Classifi cation E Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or O
277. he output frequency is automatically reduced to suppress the overload protection trip of inverter caused by an increase in the ambient temperature operation frequency motor load or the like Auto tuning Automatically tunes the motor for rl Xo excitation current and slip frequency 12 Cooling fan ON OFF Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature is low control Secondary motor setting One inverter can be used to control two motors by switching switching is not available while a motor is running Base frequency rated current torque boost electronic thermal and slip compensation can be set as data for the secondary motor The second motor constants can be set in the inverter Auto tuning possible Universal DI The presence of digital signal in a device externally connected to the set terminal can be sent to the master controller Universal AO The output from the master controller can be output from the terminal FM Speed control The motor speed can be detected with the pulse encoder and speed can be controlled When the optional PG interface card is installed Positioning control Only one program can be executed by setting the number of pulses to the stop position and deceleration point When the optional PG interface card is installed Rotation direction control Select either of reverse or forward rotation prevention 8 6
278. hecks The inverter has the function for outputting dummy alarm signals enabling simple checking of sequence operations of peripheral devices from the control panel where the inverter is used Consideration of peripheral equipment and a full range of protective functions B Side by side mounting saves space If your control panel is designed to use multiple inverters these inverters make it possible to save space through their horizontal side by side installation 3 7 kW or smaller models 8 HES HES 120 The 3 phase 200 V 0 75 kW model is shown here Figure 1 14 1 1 Features B Resistors for suppressing inrush current are built in making it possible to reduce the capacity of peripheral equipment When FRENIC Multi Series including FRENIC Mini Series FRENIC Eco Series and 11 Series is used the built in resistor suppresses the inrush current generated when the motor starts Therefore it is possible to select peripheral equipment with lower capacity when designing your system than the equipment needed for direct connection to the motor deyo B Outside panel cooling is also made possible using the mounting adapter for external cooling option The mounting adapter for external cooling option can be installed easily as an outside panel cooling system This function is standard on 5 5 kW or higher models You can use an inverter equipped with functions like these BInIN DIN3HA OL NOILONGOYLNI
279. hermistor input PTC function The C1 function V2 function or PTC function can be assigned to terminal C1 Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function code For details refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 8 3 Terminal Specifications Functions 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input current 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 4 mA DC O to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID process command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 2500 Maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage 0to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation 10 to 0 VDC O to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID process command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22 kQ Maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC 1 Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection The figure shown below illustrates the internal circuit diagram To use the PTC thermistor you must change data of the function code H26 13
280. hese requirements E Shielded Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic electric equipment Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from being affected by noise from external sources including the power input output lines of the inverter themselves Even if the signal lines are inside the power control panel always use this category of cables when the length of wiring is longer than normal Cables satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa s BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges 6 2 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals Table 6 1 summarizes average effective electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment options and electric wires for each inverter including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating Table 6 1 Currents Flowing through Inverter Nominal 200 V 400 V 50 Hz Ras 2 sass 220 V 200 V 440 V 400 V 60 Hz applied Input RMS current A DC link Braking resistor Input RMS current A DC link Braking resistor elos motor DC reactor DCR bus current circuit current DC reactor DCR bus current circuit current W a 0 1 0 57 11 0 7 0 82 0 51 0 55 11 11 0 62 0 7 0 82 17 1 12 12 1 6 Three 3 6 phase 35 200v 57 41 284 312 23 3 25 6 64 61 m 9 1
281. hows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit DC link bus voltage Unit V volts LED monitor shows item No 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 19 Alarm Information Displayed continued Item displayed Max temperature of heat sink Description Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to BI Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Multiple alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 communications control Refer to B Displaying c
282. i standard 8 series motors Current standard e P99 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard P99 4 Other motors Other manufacturer s or unknown motors Lx If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Fuji standard 8 series a The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 59 keys or be EI keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization PO1 P03 P06 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A15 A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initial
283. ications error option Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Option s ROM version Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code Cumulative motor run time Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ 00 above 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 10 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 19 lists the details of the alarm information Power ON y Ma M H i 1 Pac List of alarm codes Running status info at the time T an alarm occurred GO AEREA l QAIA ON Item us Output frequency co pm 4 S Switching at approx EI c LL hg 1 second intervals EE cme cae 1 bod e Sui RI R Item Output current Switching at approx 1 second intervals Li Ad I i OPO Item T Error sub code Switching at approx 1 second intervals fa M
284. ications link can be used only as a port for host equipment not used for a keypad or FRENIC Loader For details of RS 485 communication refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b 5 1 G deyo NOLLVOINPIININOO S87 SH HONOYHL BNINNNE 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications standard and optional Items Specifications Protocol FGI BUS Modbus RTU Loader commands supported only on the standard version Compliance Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Modicon Modbus RTU compliant only in RTU mode Dedicated protocol Not disclosed No of supporting stations Host device 1 Inverters Up to 31 Electrical specifications EIA RS 485 Connection to RS 485 RJ 45 connector standard or terminal block optional Synchronization Asynchronous start stop system Transmission mode Half duplex Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Max transmission cable length 500 m No of logical station addresses available 1to31 1 to 247 1 to 255 Message frame format FGI BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC loader Frame synchronization SOH Start Of Header character detection Detection of no data transmission time for 3 byte period Start code 96H detection Frame length Normal transmission 16 bytes fixed High speed transmission 8 or 12 bytes Variable length Variable length Max t
285. idered that conduction noise entered through the power supply line into the photoelectric relay A proximity switch d PORT a Hi Ho Fiesit BPezoargty Way paih Possible cause It is considered that the capacitance type proximity switch is susceptible to conduction and radiation noise because of its low noise immunity A 10 Noise prevention measures Insert a 0 1 uF capacitor between the output common terminal of the amplifier of the photoelectric relay and the frame 1 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter 2 Install a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter Ground the 0 V common line of the DC power supply of the proximity switch through a capacitor to the box body of the machine 1 If a low current circuit at the malfunctioning side is observed the measures may be simple and economical 1 Noise generated in the inverter can be reduced 2 The switch is superseded by a proximity switch of superior noise immunity such as a magnetic type device Pressure sensor Position detector pulse encoder Program mable logic controller PLC App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Continued Phenomena A pressure sensor malfunctioned eerie M E uxelf Xf 1 DC HY tH prensa Pow wl peor ET ja rip W Sharia wine Possible cause The pressure s
286. ilt into the inverter or with the external signal input 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose For the purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually f ice When your system requires starting stopping the motor s driven by the inverter with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow It is recommended that terminal commands FWD REV and HLD for 3 wire operation or the keypad be used for starting stopping the motor At the output side Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to 1 Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example when a circuit that switches the motor driving power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines is connected to the inverter As application of the external current to the inverter s secondary output circuits may break th
287. ing level for driving Limiting level for braking 20 to 20096 999 Disable 20 to 20096 999 Disable Torque vector control 1 0 Inactive 1 Active A 40 Control mode selection 1 0 Disable V f operation with slip compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation E Extension terminal functions FVR E11S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S X1 terminal function X2 terminal function X3 terminal function X4 terminal function X5 terminal function Multistep freq select SS7 Multistep freq select SS2 Multistep freq select SS4 Multistep freq select SS8 ACC DEC time selection RTT 3 wire operation stop command HLD Coast to stop command BX Alarm reset RST Trip command external fault THR Freq set 2 Freq set Hz2 Hz1 Motor 2 Motor 1 M2 M1 DC brake command DCBRK Torque limiter 2 Torque limiter 1 TL2 TL1 UP command UP DOWN command DOWN Write enable for keypad WE KP PID control cancel Hz PID Inverse mode changeover IVS Link enable LE Terminal X1 function Terminal X2 function Terminal X3 function Terminal X4 function Terminal X5 function Select multi frequency SS7 Select multi frequency SS2 Select multi frequency SS4 Select multi fr
288. ion Enable timer operation fn Pressing the key during timer countdown quits the timer operation Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the mH key Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation example Preparation Set E43 data to 13 LED monitor to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set C21 to 1 Enable timer operation Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the 15 key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the key 6 deu 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the key to set the timer for the desired count in seconds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the Key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops without pressing the key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible Mate After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays end and any LED
289. ion Auto Torque Boost Variable torque load 9 18 Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Constant torque load 9 37 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F39 9 33 9 37 F40 Torque Limiter 1 9 37 Limiting level for driving F41 Limiting level for braking F42 Control Mode Selection 1 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface F43 Current Limiter Disable No current limiter works 9 39 Mode selection Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC Enable during ACC constant speed operation for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 to 900 MA for Braking Resistor Di Discharging capability 0 0 000 Reserved 9 1 Function Code Tables E codes Extension Terminal Functions Default Refer to Code Data setting range i setting page E01 Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 9 43 terminals X1 to X5 as listed below E02 Terminal X2 Function 1000 Select multi frequency SS1 E03 Terminal X3 Function 1001 Select multi frequency SS2 E04 Terminal X4 Function 1002 Select multi fre
290. ipe Figure A 9 Treatment of Braided Wire of Shielded Wire 2 Control panel The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal which can shield noise radiated from the inverter itself When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control panel be careful with the layout of each device If necessary arrange shield plates between the inverter and peripheral devices App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 3 Anti noise devices To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main circuit wiring to the air a line filter and power supply transformer should be used refer to Figure A 10 Line filters are available in these types the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet radio noise regulations Use them according to the targeted effect for reducing noise Power supply transformers include common insulated transformers shielded transformers and noise cutting transformers These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise propagation Inverter IP Imeera oy LI 7 IT E NM dl i J E ug ir T t L 1 L ea LIT Li 17 a Capacitive filter b Inductiv
291. ircuit boards Starting Mode Delay time HO9 Starting Mode Auto search For details about the auto search delay time refer to the description of H09 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Voltage F04 to F06 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency F04 to F06 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Voltage F04 to F06 For details about the setting of the non linear V f pattern refer to the descriptions of F04 to y Mane E p e A ACC DEC Time Jogging operation H54 specifies the common acceleration and deceleration time for jogging operation Data setting range 0 00 to 3600 s LL For details about the jogging operation JOG refer to E01 to E05 that assign terminal commands to digital input terminals X1 to X5 9 95 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Deceleration Time for Forced Stop Assigning the Force to stop command STOP to a digital input terminal data 30 and turning it ON decelerates the inverter output to stop in accordance with the H56 data When the output has stopped the inverter enters an alarm stop state with alarm er 6 displayed UP DOWN Control Initial frequency setting H61 specifies the initial reference frequency to be applied at startup of UP DOWN control that increases or decreases the reference frequency with the UP DOWN terminal command LL For details refer to functio
292. is triggered when ON 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Terminal function assignment and data setting m Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals SSI SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency O to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SSI SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others For details refer to the block diagram in Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Selected frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi frequency OFF OFF OFF ON C05 Multi frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF C06 Multi frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON C07 Multi frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF C08 Multi frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON C09 Multi frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF C10 Multi frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON C11 Multi frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF C12 Multi frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON C13 Multi frequency 9 ON OFF ON OFF C14 Multi frequency 10 ON OFF ON ON C15 Multi frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF C16 Multi frequency 12 ON ON OFF ON
293. is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to O and the count will start again e deyo DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature of heat sink Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Max effective output current Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Unit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VHddO Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SI47 1094 E Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit 96 Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Cumulative run time of the cooling fan Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan This counter does not work when the
294. isplay range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Number of RS 485 errors standard Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error standard Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Number of option errors Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number of RS 485 errors option Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS 485 communication since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 commun
295. ivalent to the current that flows through the output terminal under the rated input and output conditions the output voltage current frequency and load factor meet their rated conditions Essentially inverter rated at 200 V covers the current of a 200 V 50 Hz 6 pole motor and inverter rated at 400 V covers the current of a 380 V 50 Hz 4 pole motor Rated output voltage A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage that is generated across the output terminal when the AC input voltage supply voltage and frequency meet their rated conditions and the output frequency of the inverter equals the base frequency Required power supply capacity The capacity required of a power supply for an inverter This is calculated by solving either of the following equations and is stated in kVA Required power supply capacity KVA 3 x 200 x Input RMS current 200 V 50 Hz or 4 3 x 220x Input RMS current 220 V 60 Hz Required power supply capacity KVA 4 3 x 400 x Input RMS current 400 V 50 Hz or 43 x 440 x Input RMS current 40 V 60 Hz Glossary Running mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters this mode which you may run stop the motor set up the set frequency monitor the running status and jog the motor S curve acceleration deceleration weak strong To reduce the shock to the machine during acceleration deceleration
296. ized to the values listed in tables on the following pages To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Motor Rated capacity 2 P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection 3 H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters H03 2 or 3 4 P03 A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set Motor Rated current data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor e Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default If the PO2 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with HO3 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor rating see the tables on the following pages If initialized motor parameters revert to the default data specified for each of the V f settings listed below To use motors whose base frequency rated voltage or number of poles is different non Fuji motors or other series of motors change the data to the rated current printed on the nameplate P99 00r4 Fujistandard 8 series motor 4 poles 200 V 50 Hz or 400 V 50 Hz p99 3 P99 1 Fuji standard 6 series motor 4 poles 200 V 50 Hz or 400 V 50 Hz HP rating motor 4 poles 230 V 60 Hz or 460 V 60 Hz 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m When Fuji
297. ke signal makes it even more convenient At brake release time After the motor operates torque generation is detected and signals are output At brake application time Brake application that matches the timing can be done and so mechanical brake wear is reduced B Limit operations can be selected to match your equipment Inverters are equipped with two limit operations torque limitation and current limitation so either can be selected to match the equipment you are using the inverter with Torque limitation In order to protect mechanical systems this function accurately limits the torque generated by the motor Instantaneous torque cannot be limited Current limitation This function limits the current flowing to the motor to protect the motor thermally or to provide rough load limitation Instantaneous current cannot be limited Auto tuning is not required Simple and thorough maintenance B The life information on each of the inverter s limited life components is displayed Cooling fan cumulative running time comparasiod by cooling fas DAUOFF conira Main circuit capacitor capacity Cumulative cunning time of the ebectrotytic capacitor on the prinbed circuit board Figure 1 8 m Simple cooling fan replacement Construction is simple enabling quick removal of the top cover and making it easy to replace the cooling fan 5 5 kW or higher models Cooling fan replacement proced
298. l In PD control the moment that a deviation occurs the control rapidly generates much manipulated value than that generated by D action alone to suppress the deviation increase When the deviation becomes small the behavior of P action becomes small A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied In such a case use PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action for keeping the system stable That is PD control is applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process 3 PID control PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation suppression of D action PID control features minimal control deviation high precision and high stability In particular PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal solution for each system Increase the data of J03 PID control P Gain within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Decrease the data of J04 PID control I Integral time within the range where the fe
299. l DOWN l 5l TA A l O O 2 71 D I O card Gain T TO D I O card O O can Cca2 c4 11 input terminal option 12 13 I O O E Pulse train ES PG card PG card input terminal option gt Standard keypad OFF if y98 1 3 RJ 45 port RS 485 or H30 4 5 8 Host equipment oo Frequency command via 2 communications OFF if y98 2 1 3 or H30 1 3 7 Host equipment communications OE 0 option card ivi I OFF if Last yal Ded 71 8105 command 2 1 to take effect Host equipment Field bus option card O PID control Remote command SV Dancer reference position UP DOWN control l Initial frequency setting l UP T command UP UPI DOWN SON l Select command coring n multi frequency T P 13 4O SS4 SS8 Dancer PID a2 reference Gain Bias command via position a WEN communications I LA eo C1 C1 function ZR Gain Bias O E 0 l Obf 4 C1 V2 function Gain Bias C42 X C44 C51 C52 PID control Feedback filter Figure 4 5 1 PID Dancer Control Block Input Stage l l C08 0 Multi frequency 4 I o Multi frequency 8 o Multi frequency 12 L PID feedback amount 7 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block Select frequency Enable command 2 1 communications link Select multi frequency Hz2 Hz1 via RS 485 or field bus
300. l DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or ELCB when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting a voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 1 to 5 VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 For the control signal wires use shielded or twisted pair wires Ground the shielded wires To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles 8 29 g deu SNOI VOIJIO3dS 8
301. ls maximum number of monitor item to be displayed is 8 channels measured at fixed sampling intervals of 200 ms which represent the running status of a selected inverter These quantities are displayed in real time waveforms on a time trace Waveform capturing capability Max 15 360 samples channel Sub panes Set up the monitor items Status of Cursor Save Data Hardcopy Cursor scroll Blinks during the Position graph monitoring position the monitor slide real time trace running zr POR ad lima Era Podes pant Matri im ng won pri Paabloria lace G deyo Aa canna ciet ma dur EI MP Dipa hee FE Ota cue ert nas WA ul PaT reai Dima rel OH HA T al A Pall reus oir UF aar TE DH D wra hone DHb m OF AT ununi TOES Een wll EF Fla a r D ttan rar Arms NOLLVOINPIININOO 8yS8 HDNOYHL ONINNNY START STOP Monitoring items Advanced setting Scope scroll Cursor Monitor window the real time trace of the channels of the channels slide Note During the real time trace in progress you cannot Change the RS 485 station address Change the advanced waveform settings or Scroll the real time trace screen or move the cursor Resizing the real time trace window automatically changes the monitor window size 5 11 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CHAPTER 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
302. lue code data for E43 Monitor items QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VHd3dO Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED indicators 9 Speed monitor Output frequency before slip compensation 5 00 Frequency actually being output E48 0 Output frequency after slip compensation Frequency actually being output E48 1 Reference frequency Reference frequency being set E48 2 120 Motor speed Output frequency Hz x Ful E48 3 For motor 2 read PO1 as A15 Load shaft speed Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 Line speed Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 5 Constant feeding E50 rate time Output frequency Hz x E39 E48 6 Output current Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Motor output torque in Calculated Calculated torque value Input power Input power to the inverter PID command PID command feedback amount 3 4 transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled PID feedback e g temperature amount Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details 3 5 Timer Timer operation 3 Remaining time of timer operation PID output in 96 as the maximum PID output 3 4 frequency F03 being at 10096 For motor 2 read F03 as AOI 6 t Load factor of the motor in as the rated output being at 100 L
303. m ing area o E em pejus e en A 27 G 2 Terminal arrangements and symbols This section shows the difference in the terminal arrangements and their symbols between the FRENIC Mult series and the replaceable inverter series FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 2 kW Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 kW Three phase 200 V 0 4 to 3 7 kW Three phase 200 V 1 5 to 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 0 4 to 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 0 4 to 3 7 kW Single phase 200 V 1 5 to 2 2 kW Single phase 200 V 1 5 to 2 2 kW E Direction of wire guide A 28 FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi FVR El1S Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 kW o6 et eco pajas 71 u vw os jos im pes V Three phase 200 V 1 5 to 2 2 kW Three phase 400 V 0 4 to 2 2 kW iain nup fafaa p prs pos xejrape v ra ra onim cap A 29 App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 kW a Jade rajo pp uly w m t Three phase 200 V 1 5 to 2 2 kW Three phase 400 V 0 4 to 2 2 kW be rdrde frui pp ps in M ri Three phase 200 V 3 7 kW Three phase 200 V 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 3 7 kW COLI DT C ES un v S Three phase 200 V 5 5 to 7 5 kW Three phase 200 V 5 5 to 7 5 kW Three phase 400 V 5 5 to 7 5 kW Three phase 400 V 5
304. m that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power supply so as to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and improve the power factor of inverter Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 e At the time of shipping a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P on the b eee terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR e Ifa DCR is not going to be used do not remove the jumper bar P LAIR LA U Power supply FRENIC Mutti Figure 6 9 External View of a DC Reactor DCR and Connection Example 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl id ONILOQ3 T3S Table 6 9 DC Reactors DCRs Pawar Nominal DC reactor DCR applied supply t Inverter type voltage motor Rated current Inductance Coil resistance KW A mH mQ Generated loss 14 75 ern7seis20 ocmz75 a os o r 1 mwner 0 ocn so os 79 35 mmwieis2n ocras o oa qee ag aesae pee c ro ue e 10 E 21 28 Xue 28 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note 1 A box OD in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Note 2 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power supply is three phase 200
305. mand DOWN oO OF 9 D 1 0 card 3745 DUO card input terminal Oo option Pulse train E gt PG card PG card input terminal option Standard keypad OFF if y98 1 3 RJ 45 port RS 485 or H30 4 5 8 Host equipment Oo Frequency command via communications OFF if y98 1 3 or H30 1 3 7 RS 485 3 Host equipment communications option card OFF if H30 1 3 to 5 7 8 Host equipment 8 Field bus option card Oo command to take effect Last AA Figure 4 1 1 Drive Frequency Command Block Input Stage 4 2 CEQ 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Select frequency Enable Select d i command 2 1 communications link multi frequency OL eady for jogging Hz2 Hz1 via RS 485 or field bus 551 552 554 588 JoG LE GE Frequency FO command 1 pt 3 Frequency O 1 limiter High Communications i OrTQ GB notion Bus link rA O SE function m 1 Jump Drive frequency no EN frequency TN EO Frequency Frequency Multi frequency 11 Multi frequency 12 Multi frequency 13 Multi frequency 14 Multi frequency 15 limiter limiter 2 C20 M cion Multi frequency 1 C05 O Jogging Multi frequency 2 C06 O frequency Multi frequency 3 C07 O Multi frequency 4 C08 O Multi frequency5 C09 O Multi frequency 6 C10 4 O Auxiliary frequency
306. mers receiving high voltage or special high voltage When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline follow the terms listed below The following descriptions are based on Technical document for suppressing harmonics JEAG 9702 1995 published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA 1 Calculation of equivalent capacity Pi The equivalent capacity Pi may be calculated using the equation of input rated capacity x conversion factor However catalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated capacities so a description of the input rated capacity is shown below 1 Inverter rated capacity corresponding to Pi In the guideline the conversion factor of a 6 pulse converter is used as reference conversion factor 1 It is therefore necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value including harmonic component current equivalent to conversion factor 1 Calculate the input fundamental current I from the kW rating and efficiency of the load motor as well as the efficiency of the inverter Then calculate the input rated capacity as shown below Input rated capacity AES x power supply voltage x T x 1 0228 1000 kVA where 1 0228 is the 6 pulse converter s value of effective current fundamental current When a general purpose motor or inverter motor is used the appropriate value shown in Table B 2 can be used Select a value bas
307. mmand FWD or REV to run the motor Keypad Enables 55i i keys to run and stop the motor Note Forward rotation that this run command enables only the forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Keypad Enables E keys to run and stop the motor Note Reverse rotation that this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Mote When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse e REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided Maximum Frequency 1 A01 Maximum Frequency 2 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment rating ACAUTION The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment
308. mmand and its feedback J01 3 Under the PID dancer control the PID dancer positioning command and its feedback operate the range within 100 so specify the value at 100 of the PID command or its feedback as coefficient A with E40 and the value at 100 as coefficient B with E41 Value displayed 6 deu PID display coefficient A E hb eee ee Lr PAD display coetficient B PID command S3009 NOILONNA If the sensor output is unipolar the PID dancer control operates within the range from 0 to 100 so virtually specify the value at 100 as coefficient B That is suppose b Display value at 0 then Display coefficient B 2b A L For details about the PID control refer to the description of JO1 and later LL For the display method of the PID command and its feedback refer to the description of E43 LED Display Filter E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output frequency output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad If it is difficult to read data displayed on the monitor due to load fluctuation or other causes increase this filter time constant LED Monitor Item selection E48 LED Monitor Item selection E43 specifies the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor Function Data for E43 Displays the following Description Speed monitor Selected by the sub item of function code E
309. monitor item O for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item S3009 NOILONNA C30 Frequency Command 2 F01 Frequency Command 1 For details of frequency command 2 refer to the description of F01 C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Filter time constant C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Filter time constant C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The table below summarizes their interrelation The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment Analog input Offset control Input filter time constant Terminal 12 C31 C33 Terminal C1 C1 function C38 Terminal C1 V2 function C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant C32 Analog Input Adju
310. mum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 9 FO5 D o 7 c Z Output frequency Hz e Base Maximum o frequency 1 frequency 1 gt F04 F03 Q O U m n W V f pattern with two non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage 53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vf pattern 1 V f pattern2 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 F07 Acceleration Time 1 E10 Acceleration Time 2 Deceleration Time 1 E11 Deceleration Time 2 F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency FO8 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc time 1 F07 Dec time 1 Maximum F08 frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 F25 F23 Actual Actual acc time dec time Fiaa If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times Refer to the description of H07 for details Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the curre
311. n Level or E37 Current detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 9046 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary Fila Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but also for the operation level of the current detection ID Refer to the description of E34 m PID alarm PID ALM Function code data 42 Assigning this output signal enables PID control specified by J11 through J13 to output absolute value alarm and deviation alarm m Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 MI terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Function code data 12 m Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA m Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode Frequency Arrival
312. n 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light 2 2 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad B LED monitor In Running mode the LED monitor displays running status information output frequency current or voltage in Programming mode it displays menus function codes and their data and in Alarm mode it displays an alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated If one of LED4 through LEDI is blinking it means that the cursor is at this digit allowing you to change it If the decimal point of LEDI is blinking it means that the currently displayed data is a value of the PID process command not the frequency data usually displayed LED4 LED3 LED LEDI ae fae ie J MEE L Figure 2 4 7 Segment LED Monitor Table 2 2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor Character 7 segment Character 7 segment Character 7 segment Character 7 segment i r r Special characters and symbols numbers with decimal point minus and underscore O E EA PEA A AS E Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Multi supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression keys st
313. n base point 0 00 to 100 00 Terminal C1 V2 function C42 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Function code F18 Bias C50 Bias base point Data setting range 96 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 W Inthe case of unipolar input Terminal 12 with C35 1 terminal C1 C1 function or terminal C1 V2 function As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 Pn The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value E Note S F18 Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz 6 deu
314. n code J02 to 0 i e Keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E4320 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID command with the key To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with the 4 key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the key to display the PID dancer position command The lowest digit blinks on the LED monitor 4 To change the command press the key again The command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory as function code J57 data It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via keypad PID command Furthermore you can directly configure the command with function code J57 QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO P Tip e Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID command SS4 or SS8 ON you still can set the PID dancer position command using the keypad e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID
315. n codes E01 to E05 that assign terminal commands to digital input terminals X1 to X5 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 Frequency Limiter High F16 Frequency Limiter Low For how to set up this function code data refer to the descriptions of F15 and F16 Low Limiter Lower limiting frequency H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control is activated Normally it is not necessary to change the lower limit of frequency Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 Control Mode Selection 1 A40 Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions For details about the setting of slip compensation 1 refer to the description of F42 H70 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or brake unit if regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration deceleration and constant speed
316. n time PID control The scheme of control that brings controlled objects to a desired value quickly and accurately and which consists of three categories of action proportional integral and differential Proportional action minimizes errors from a set point Integral action resets errors from a desired value to 0 Differential action applies a control value in proportion to a differential component of the difference between the PID reference and feedback values Related function codes E01 to E05 E40 E41 E43 E61 to E63 C51 C52 JO1 to J62 G4 Programming mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter This mode uses the menu driven system and allows the user to set function codes or check the inverter status maintenance information PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor Type of thermistor with a positive temperature coefficient Used to safeguard a motor Related function codes H26 and H27 Rated capacity The rating of an inverter output capacity at the secondary side or the apparent power that is represented by the rated output voltage times the rated output current which is calculated by solving the following equation and is stated in kVA Rated capacity KVA 43 x Rated output voltage V x Rated output current A x10 The rated output voltage is assumed to be 220 V for 200 V class equipment and 440 V for 400 V class equipment Rated output current A total RMS equ
317. nal views of the FRENIC Multi series and an overview of terminal blocks including a description of the LED monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad Contents 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks oooononncccononaccocononccccnnnnccnonnnnonoonnnnconnnnoronnnnononnnancnonanos 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad sss 2 2 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks Figure 2 1 shows the external views of the FRENIC Multi z deu 1 External views Cooling fans P 7 terminal block Front cover EM SNOILONf143 ANY S3INVN S LHVd Warning m ue zp Main i PAE ial nameptala Main circuit Terminal cover Terminal cover terminal block cover Main circuit T fixing screw terminal block Figure 2 1 FRN15E1S 20 2 Terminal block location Control circuit Control circuit terminal block Terminal black s T d i P ad Main circuit Main circuit terminal block terminal block a FRNO 75E1S 20 b FRN15E1S 201 Figure 2 2 Terminal Blocks Note A box L1 in the above model names replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination L Refer to Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS for details on terminal functions arrangement and connection and to Chapter 6 Section 6 2 1 Recommended wires when selecting wires 1 For details on the keys and their functions refer to Se
318. ncy DC Braking 2 Braking level F21 DC Braking 1 Braking level DC Braking 2 Braking time F22 DC Braking 1 Braking time Starting Frequency 2 F23 Starting Frequency 1 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Control Mode Selection 2 F42 Control Mode Selection 1 Motor 2 No of poles P01 Motor 1 No of poles Motor 2 Rated capacity P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity A17 Motor 2 Rated current P03 Motor 1 Rated current Motor 2 Auto tuning P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning Motor 2 Online turning PO05 Motor 1 Online tuning Motor 2 No load current P06 Motor 1 No load current Motor 2 R1 P07 Motor 1 R1 Motor 2 X P08 Motor 1 X P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving 9 102 Motor 2 Slip compensation response time P10 Motor 1 Slip compensation response time Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking Motor 2 Rated slip frequency P12 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency Motor 2 Selection P99 Motor 1 Selection Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 ov o lt 5 s D z O 9 En c 2 2 ct O 2 O le o
319. nd 12 are exclusively applicable to the PID command dancer reference position The output of dancer reference position bandwidth detector switches PID constant set of the PID control between J03 J04 and J05 and J59 J60 and J61 This logic allows the inverter to select either controlling the output of PID processor in a ratio or add subtract of the frequency Hz to the primary frequency command The terminal command of PID cancel Hz PID cancels the compensation of PID dancer control and makes the inverter also possible to run with the primary frequency command 4 7 FM Output Selector 4 7 FM Output Selector Analog output FM Function Mode selection Gain Hardware switch SW6 FMA O FM l l SW6 FMP l Output frequency 1 Output frequency 2 Ho Output current O Output voltage 3 Q Output torque tto Load factor O l Input power E PID feedback amount PV E l Aa jo m Pulse rate y o o PG feedback value rO DC link bus voltage Universal AO g Motor output 2 Test analog output Ho PID command SV lo PID output MV TO o Figure 4 6 Terminal FM Output Selector The block diagram in Figure 4 6 shows the process for selecting and processing the internal
320. nd turned OFF Make the Mechanical mechanical brake turn on before turning the run stopper command OFF The inverter issues an alarm ZOL or IOL2 during the mechanical stopper operation Once the overload stop function is activated the inverter holds it and cannot accelerate the motor again To reaccelerate the motor turn the run command OFF and ON again f J65 2 3 the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified Configuration examples Operation Selection J65 1 or 2 Mechanical stopper Molter sped Output frequency Decelerale lo sap Caasgt to etnp Output currant Cutpust borque Time JET Operation selection J65 3 Mechanical stopper Motor speed Ohulpud frequency Torque limit Dhetechen Level JE Output Torque i Output a current Be coniro Chutpiul Current 9 116 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Operation condition J66 J66 specifies the inverter s operation Data for J66 Applicable operation mode state to apply the overload stop funci n Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation Note that carefully specify it so as not mode to induce a malfunction by any setting that is not needed Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode Takes effect in all the operation modes m Timer J67 J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop functi
321. ndard and OptioNal onncnncnncnonnnononnnnconcnnnonononancnnonononccnnonnonncnnos 5 2 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port eese 5 3 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card seen 5 4 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port eene nennen trennen trennen innen 5 4 5 1 5 Communications support devices eene none nono ener enne teen tren ne enee trennen enne 5 5 5 2 Overview ob ERENIG Loader e titor reete rie eb in cele rete pie 5 6 3 2 Specification AES 5 6 5 2 2 CORBIeCUOD oer hte ddr i dote eee edet dde men 5 7 3 2 3 Function OVervIeW s seii pU E extet ede Bea eoi 5 7 5 2 30 Setting of funci n codes sus snus kas sisi eee hU hn Guten rq erit P e ceret 5 7 35 2 32 Multi monit r i i spon o a t a e e UD p te dtd db iu 5 8 5 2 3 3 RUNNING status THOBItOF poi Te ta 5 9 5 234 ON 5 10 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms eese 5 11 5 1 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication Overview on RS 485 Communication Detaching the standard keypad from the FRENIC Multi inverter and using the standard RJ 45 connector modular jack as an RS 485 communications port brings about the following enhancements in functionality and operation B Remote operation from a keypad at the remote location Using an extension cable to connect the standard keypad or an optional mul
322. near V f pattern 1 Frequency DC link bus F15 Decal Voltage 2 phase voltage eceleration H71 characteristics convener C D Nd Q Edc Compen sation Output current fluctuation suppression gain for motor 1 Motor 1 Rated capacity Rated current No load current R1 Current fluctuation suppressor Motor sound Carrier frequency Low limiter Frequency Carrier Lower limiting limiter frequency frequency Low DC braking 1 Braking response mode DC braking Hardware Cancel if H98 0 DC braking 1 Voltage H98 Bit og Braking level calculation Starting frequency Carrier frequency reduction processor Operation analyzer E Auto search for Auto search for idling motor speed Auto search mode idling motor d Auto search for idling motor speed Auto search delay time Spes Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time aid Restart mode Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate a power failure Restart mode after momentary power failure Hie Allowable momentary power failure time Note Function codes in the above control block are for motor 1 For motor 2 read the function codes for motor 1 as the function codes for motor 2 referring to the table below Function code for motor 1 Function code for m
323. ned and bolded dimensions denote that they are smaller than those of the FRENIC Multi series nt nz r EM Bi a 1 3 pE ij d A 25 G 1 1 Standard models FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E9S IP20 FRENIC Multi IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C Ambient temperature 50 C Nominal A y Mount External dimensions mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions mm applied ing area 2 motor m x10 s 96 26 ROOD PANA o2 ros o 69 oa 7 18 er 13 wer pm renf e 9 io 09 04 ws so go ss zz 15 1091 14 1260 MEME 07 62 ME 10 10 075 105 so nta ss ee 16 1601 19 1470 MEME 132 62 E 10 13 15 wo wo 119 es ss 21 1060 25 mos MN 150 06 os 14 21 22 200 150 x94 ss 71 30 2098 o 107a MEE 150 oo M 14 20 E eum we os so neo ss o Ml vo yor or NN n on CPE ae ae ARA E EA E eae 195 98 5 96 5 A E E i i in 57 2 110 130 126 86 EJESCIEXEBETHEIS OE OOO paa le AO a TN a Ra rea a 0 S PE GEES Carranco OEA a ee ea eS ea a ee IK NES ae e AC FT a eA ECRIRE PERS ERR ee See A 26 FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E11S IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C External dimensions mm Mounting area Volume Mount External dimensions m
324. neral storage methods are described below 1 Q 3 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature range should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deterioration The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture Add a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 7096 If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the environment specified in Table 8 7 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit secondary side or run the inverter 8 22 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters according to the type Unit mm Bo D 55l ET LAE Di SE j Mr aug fObiong hi ME un a 7 s T Ft 2 a i a L a a E
325. ng kanseri Buil in App tabla uwah dandam ULM C272 Po 1d EMPDITA 1997 Sais IECBDGZU P20 UL ipi haa Coming merai Naws ping Fan canina Vased i Marai deg Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 KVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 9 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 396 use an optional AC reactor ACR 10 Voltage unbalance 96 x 67 IEC 61800 3 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 1 3 EfB 7LU Meorrinal appii rege e Quint mings Fiind capacit
326. ng motor STM speed at starting 1030 Force to stop STOP 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components Hold PID integral component PID HLD Reserved 2 Reserved 2 Reserved 2 1045 Reserved 2 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively C codes Control Functions A Default Refer to Code Data setting range j setting page running C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 9 70 C02 C03 Coa Hysteresis width C05 i 0 00 to 400 0 9 71 C06 C07 C08 cog C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 Jogging TUM 9 72 C21 Timer Operation 9 73 C30 Frequency Command 2 UP DOWN keys on keypad 9 14 E a input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 9 73 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control DIO interface card option PGinterface card option These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 9 7 6 deu S3009 NOILONN 4 C co
327. ng to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit Table 8 2 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Nominal s Power applied Terminal Tightening Grounding Tightening supply Inverter type torque torque Refer to motor screw size screw size voltage kW N m N m 0 1 FRNO 1EIS 2L1 Ue ERNOZEIS 28 M3 5 12 M3 5 1 2 Figure A 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 20 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 20 Three 1 5 FRNI 5EIS 2L1 phase 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 20 M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 200 V 3 7 FRN3 7E1S 20 5 5 FRNS 5E1S 20 M5 3 8 M5 3 8 75 FRN7 5E1S 20 Fi C igure 11 FRNIIEIS 2LI E M6 5 8 M6 5 8 Q 15 FRNISE1S 20 E 0 4 FRNO 4E1S 40 00 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 40 bs FRNLSEISALI M4 18 M4 L8 Figure B m T 2 2 FRN2 2E1S 40 Q piace 3 7 FRN3 7E18 40 3 400 V 4 0 FRN4 0E1S 4E 2 5 5 FRN5 5E1S 40 M5 3 8 M5 3 8 7 5 FRN7 5E1S 40 Fi C 0 igure T FRNIIEIS 4E sii M6 5 8 M6 5 8 15 FRNISE1S 40 0 1 FRNO 1E1S 70 0 2 FRNO 2E1S 70 M3 5 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Fi D mies 0 4 FRNOAEIS 7E Lot 300 V 0 75 FRNO 75E1S 70 1 5 FRNI SEIS 7L1 M4 18 MA 18 Fi E 23 FRN2 2E1S 70 id The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three pha
328. ning information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the t key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 19 in Section 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the 5 key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes ficis When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing Ce the key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time 3 4 4 Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing sm keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data 3 4 Alarm Mode Figure 3 11 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items r ias 2 P Running Programming ln mode n i ze x moda 4 K P ph as T 1 Mamm orus Rd p A l Tuo A D i Current alarm code pT a ia Switching al approx DUIS fraquaney arn l amp acond nlarvals Ew a ou SLL Eg XC m 3 E a l i m liem Ewilrhing ai approx Cuipul current 1 2eccnd inlervals 56 01 et T M itam amp Ewllching at acerca ETOT Sub coda 31 Yan mierda A core L Ma
329. ning status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring sseseeeeeeeeeneeee 3 18 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking esee 3 21 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information eese 3 26 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information esseeeeeeeeeeeeern 3 29 34 A bte e E RED EB ri EE eR ERUPU 3 32 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode esee eee 3 32 34 2 Displaying the alarm history 5 in o er leerla 3 32 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm sese 3 32 3 4 Switching to Programming mode sees eene on nro non enne nennen nr enne nennen 3 32 Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC 4 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings eese eene 4 1 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block sasni a ar aeee nenne tnnn nennen trennen innen 4 2 43 Drive Command Block 5 eee tenete eene iiie rade eere edes deb cuctdentveduedshcetsedeccuteedes due 4 6 4 4 ControlBlock dl 4 8 45 PID Process Gonttol Block oie erret err m ERE rn eR FCR rr ere C sits 4 12 46 PID Dancer Control Block oret reet tr ee ox Re ER o subdue tacwesns died E APEX Caere EE dae 4 16 47 FM Qutput Selector seen oorr e e E t EO Sr t Ee Es 4 19 viii Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNI
330. nput Adjustment for C1 V2 function Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C44 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 For details about bias base point setting for frequency command 1 refer to the description of F18 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA C51 C52 C53 Bias PID command 1 Bias value Bias PID command 1 Bias base point These function codes specify the bias and bias base point of the analog PID command 1 enabling it to define arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID commands The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18 For details refer to the description of F18 f Nowe Note that function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 are shared by frequency commands m Bias value C51 Data setting range 100 00 to 100 00 96 m Bias base point C52 Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 96 Selection of Normal Inverse Operation Frequency command 1 C53 switches the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 between normal and inverse LL For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through
331. nt limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one Acceleration deceleration time 1 FO7 FO8 and acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 are switched by terminal command RTI assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 41 Is Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 A05 Torque Boost 2 F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load F09 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for F37 V f pattern Variable torque V f pattern Linear V f pattern Torque boost F09 Torque boost specified by F09 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving Disable Applicable load Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Constant torque load To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Variable torque V f pattern Linear V f pattern Torque boost specified by F09 Auto torque boost Enable Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Constant torque load To b
332. nt under amount PV PID control Feedback value of closed PG feedback value loop control through the PG interface DC link bus DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 200 V class series voltage inverter 1000 V for 400 V class series 100 of the feedback amount Maximum speed 100 of the feedback value Command via communications link Universal AO Refer to the RS 485 20000 as 100 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Motor output Motor output KW Twice the rated motor output Full scale output of the This always outputs the Calibration meter calibration full scale 100 PID command Command value under PID SV control Output level of the PID PID output MV controller under PID control Frequency command 100 of the feedback amount Maximum frequency F03 A01 7 If F31 16 PID output JO1 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 data to 33 96 B Pulse rate F33 dedicated to FMP F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected 9 2 Overview of Function Codes F37 Lo
333. ntal information is given below Frequency command sourcing by the keys operation on the keypad covers various command expression formats such as a load rotational speed and a line speed by specifying data of function code E48 The input terminal natively covers the 10 to 10 VDC analog frequency command The function code C35 allows this terminal to be used as a unipolar input 0 to 10 VDC or a bipolar input 10 to 10 VDC For the unipolar input inserting the 0 limiter in the following process stage of the terminal input 12 modification of the reference frequency by the bias and gain assures the reference frequency not to always be switched to the negative frequency command causing the reverse rotation of the motor Setting slide switches SW7 and SWS on the interface printed circuit board interface PCB and data of function codes E59 and H26 characterizes the analog input terminal C1 for the current input C1 function covering 4 to 20 mA DC the voltage input V2 function covering 0 to 10 VDC or the PTC If no input such as frequency command is applied to the terminal the inverter makes of it as 0 Although the C1 terminal can be switched to either the current input C1 function or the voltage input V2 function suitable adjustment of the analog input such as the offset filter and gain should be processed by exclusively provided function codes The command loss detection is only applicable to analog inputs of
334. nverter noise for details of the principle of inverter operation Generating mechanism of surge voltages As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage the magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 42 times that of the source voltage about 620 V in case of an input voltage of 440 VAC The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC voltage value But as there exists inductance L and stray capacitance C in wiring between the inverter and the motor the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals Refer to Figure C 1 This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage 620 V x 2 approximately 1 200 V depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring conditions Surge vollage a mS i fi n 820 VOC 1 i i i LL LII LLI A E NR Commercial invgrtgr Motor powar supply i a Figure C 1 Voltage Waveform of Individual Portions A measured example in Figure C 2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverte
335. o Code Name Data setting range setting page Disable Enable Process control normal operation J01 PID Control Mode selection Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control UP DOWN keys on keypad PID command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control Command via communications link J02 Remote command SV J03 P Gain CIE NN IET J04 Integral time J05 D Differential time J06 Feedback filter J10 Anti reset windup J11 Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch Ji2 Upper level alarm AH Eee LL CC CA ZAS EAS J13 Lower level alarm AL 100 to 100 y 999 The F15 data applies J19 Lower limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 The F16 data applies J56 Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 J57 Dancer reference position 100 to 100 A o J58 Detection width of dancer position deviation J59 P Gain 2 J60 Integral time 2 J61 D Differential time 2 J62 PID control blockselection Bit 0 PID output pole 0 addition 1 subtraction Bit 1 Select compensation of output ratio 0 speed commana 1 ratio 0 Torque Detection value 1 Current J64 Detection level 2oto2z00 ft J65 Vode selection
336. oad factor Motor output 7 Motor output in kW 2 3 4 5 6 7 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so E appear instead When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter U in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID command specified by function code J01 21 2 or 3 The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 3 C codes Control Functions When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appear When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for 46 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 3 2 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using i and keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed or speed by setting function code E
337. oes not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting gt Stop frequency 1 1 l i frequency i E25 F2 Time Inverter Out of running Out of running running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF Time 6 deyo S3009 NOILONN 4 Motor Sound Carrier frequency F27 Motor Sound Tone B Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz Motor sound noise emission High Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High amp Low Ripples in output current waveform Large Small Leakage current Low gt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low gt High Inverter loss Low gt High fois Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to CC have a large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 8046 or less of the rated
338. of J57 PID control Dancer reference position and is saved as function code data 9 107 Data Setting Range of PID Command Only applicable to an analog input To select an analog input as a PID command define the setting range of the PID command As with frequency setting you can arbitrary map the relationship between the command and the analog input value by adjusting the gain and bias LL For details refer to the descriptions of C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 C44 C51 and C52 Example Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal 12 to 0 through 10096 Process command 10096 E aE Poe ee y Gain C32 100 po Gain base pain C34 50 ud i Blas value C51 0 Pres Bias base point C52 10 f Inpul al terminal 12 wviv 5v 10 v PID display coefficient and monitoring To monitor PID commands and feedback amounts define the display factor for converting them to numeric control values such as temperature for display Refer to the descriptions of E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients and to E43 for details on monitoring m Gain J03 J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor Data setting range 0 000 to 30 000 multiple P Proportional action An operation in which an MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the deviation is called P action which outputs a manipulated value in proportion to deviation However the manipulated variable alone cannot eliminate
339. of inverters it replaces A C J or K 9 41 Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data When using a braking resistor other than the ones listed in the above table calculate data to be set to function codes according to the tables and expressions m Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle which is obtained by the following expressions 1 Regeneration power during deceleration and 2 Regeneration power at a constant speed based on the braking time and motor rating Data for F50 Function 0 Reserved 1 to 900 1 to 900 KWs 999 Disable the electronic thermal overload protection facility During deceleration Discharging capacity kWs Braking time s zer rating KW 1 At a constant speed Discharging capacity kWs Braking time s x Motor rating kW 2 m Allowable average loss F51 The allowable average loss refers to resistance allowable for motor continuous operation which is obtained by the following expressions 3 Regeneration power during deceleration and 4 Regeneration power at a constant speed based on the ED and motor rating kW Reserved 0 001 to 50 000 0 001 to 50 000 kW During deceleration WED Allowable average loss kW 100 x Motor rating KW 3 2 At a constant speed Allowable av
340. of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ID data 37 or ID2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals E34E37 EAXAJE2 x 0 5 ulpa Curren Dr ENTER i 6 deu S3009 NOILONN 4 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Constant feeding rate time min z Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Load shaft speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9 appears PID Display Coefficient A PID Display Coefficient B These function codes specify PID display coefficients A and B to convert a PID command and its feedback into mnemonic physical quantities to display Data setting range 999 to 0 00 to 9990 for PID display coefficients A and
341. oise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz Therefore the noise will affect devices such as AM radios using low frequency band but will not virtually affect FM radios and television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band Power sug ply s i a oF M J cd ent v Ds lin Es ome Figure A 1 Outline of Inverter Configuration App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Types of noise Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A 2 According to those routes noises are roughly classified into three types conduction noise induction noise and radiation noise Power supp E Radio trenstonmer X E Oho eLce e Inverter 3i 1 Pi i 5 Machina i s an E al 4 Ari paene Amplifier n Electronic bolera 8 Figure A 2 Noise Propagation Routes 1 Conduction noise Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect peripheral devices of the inverter Figure A 3 This noise is called conduction noise Some conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit If the ground wires are connected to a common ground conduction noise will propagate thro
342. ol circuit terminals iieii iieii ii dee e ded deeds 8 20 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 00 0 0 ccecceesceesceeeceseceseceseceecseeeaeeeaeeseeeseeeaeeneeeereeeeens 8 21 84 L Operating environment 4 seemed re EU er etin Oe e derer D n En tes 8 21 8 42 Storage environmentcc xc tete due t to ed ted en atto 8 22 SAD Temporary Stora ges red Ree T D MR e I i e t ER I ERAN UI IRR 8 22 8 1 2 2 ong term Storage siue ida av Pee eu AE dose 8 22 8 5 External Dimensions SI t e de doe C Ee te e atti oes 8 23 8 5 T Standard models eei he dosh ei aii nee EUH nre p ee dede ie eee ae eda 8 23 852 Standard keypad i eo eot eod teo ted teat ttt pese 8 26 8 6 Connection Did grams sni eese ie ede eden este edidere de ee e P D He CURE ER EE de SER 8 27 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad sessssssssessesseseeee ener nnne nennen nnne 8 27 8 6 2 Running the inverter by terminal commands 0ooooocnccnnocnoonconoconononccnncon nono nonn nono nono non non n ron rn eren enn 8 28 8 7 Protective Functions ni ds ive vete eRe oie tet ie eee rete oe eos es 8 30 8 1 Standard Models 8 4 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series h i T WMMNEU Tepa FAN _ ETSI i 02 Qad 0 75 1 5 22 al 55 Sorina no plis rentur ET n3 az oa ove 15 22 lar 55 Finini capaci hinh a 03 0 57 3 1 a z Si aa B 05 12 Rated voltage v Tare phase
343. oltage is applied constant speed inadvertently stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops lu Yes 1 protection below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for three phase 200V 400 VDC for three phase 400 V class series However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase loss Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This lin Yes protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running Op Yes loss protection and during running stopping the inverter output Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink Oh1 Yes protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to dbh Yes overheating of an external braking resistor Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking resistor 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 30 8 7 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload St
344. on between normal and inverse the logic inverses the polarity of difference between the PID command and its feedback turning the INV command on off or setting data JO1 at 1 or 2 919017 1OH1NOO HOS SWVHOVIG 2018 Marito 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block LED monitor speed monitor tem Keypad operation 0 12 Reference frequency Motor speed in r min to oad shaft s 4 30 slo rate time comma d E 0 Ea Y 0 Frequency command 1 ea 1 Gain Bias POT we HO l l C35 1 12 Filter C32 X C34 F18 X C50 12 Offset A cse Xcs4YF18 X C50 o limiter l 0 limiter Hardware Cl PTCthemistor l switch Ci function Mode selection SW7 C1 2l Ct O O tO 3 C1 o O Meme p C nda O limiter Hardware Ci Mode Giara me l switch Ct function selection AA SW7 V2 E59 1 E oo OF AT 11 O Ie o 126 Ct V2fundion 0 limiter 1 OB V2funaion Filter Frequency Offset command 2 Hardware PTCthemistor OTS 1 switch Mode selection 11 SW8 ON H26 1 tO l E oo O l 2 UP DOWN control Ly Aralm l Initial frequency setting 0h4 l PTCthemristor l UP Level 1 command Hs UP 3l DOWN DOWN Gain l command conet i
345. on by any unexpected momentary load fluctuation If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the timer J67 the inverter activate it in case of J65 1 or 2 Fuata EJOS 3 the timer setting is ignored In this case the inverter decelerates the motor instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to interfere running of this function J68 Braking Signal Brake OFF current J69 Braking Signal Brake OFF frequency a gt J70 Braking Signal Brake OFF timer Ce J71 Braking Signal Brake ON frequency a Z J72 Braking Signal Brake ON timer 2 O Z These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of hoisting elevating Q machines 9 Releasing the Brake to The inverter releases the brake Terminal command BRKS ON after checking torque generation of the motor monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to the motor which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough Function code Data setting range 0 to 20096 Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100 Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Brake OFF current 9 117 Turning on the brake To assure the service life of brake body the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough less than one specified monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency lowers
346. on of SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 and the selected frequencies are as follows Selected frequency command OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi frequency OFF OFF OFF ON C05 multi frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF C06 multi frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON C07 multi frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF C08 multi frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON C09 multi frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF C10 multi frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON C11 multi frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF C12 multi frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON C13 multi frequency 9 Q ON OFF ON OFF C14 multi frequency 10 2 ON OFF ON ON C15 multi frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF C16 multi frequency 12 z ON ON OFF ON C17 multi frequency 13 ON ON ON OFF C18 multi frequency 14 o ON ON ON ON C19 multi frequency 15 m Other than multi frequency includes frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 and other command sources except multi frequency commands To use these features you need to assign multi frequency selections SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 data 0 1 2 and 3 to the digital input terminals For the relationship between multi frequency operation and other frequency commands refer to Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block m When enabling PID control J01 1 2 or 3 Under the PID control a multi frequency command can be specified as a preset value 3 different frequencies It can also be used for a manual speed command even with the PID c
347. onfigured choose 19200 bps or below 5 2 2 Connection By connecting a number of inverters to one PC you can control one inverter at a time or a number of inverters simultaneously You can also simultaneously monitor a number of inverters on the multi monitor For how to connect a PC to one or more inverters refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b 5 2 3 Function overview 5 2 3 1 Setting of function code You can set edit and check the setting of the inverter s function code data List and Edit In List and edit you can list and edit function codes with function code No name set value set range and factory default You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs Function code group Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter Result of search by function code name User specified function code set D c Z z Z e I D O c e I JJ eol K co a Q O c Z gt d O Z a bar t Corn T Crargs Foie ae ha O NT Haud S e FO OE SG Faria Tg miei FO Taba mikr Lu mm m ds nah d D KETPAD apermin ii impr ERSTE Cl rra O As DO fabs rhe E Tied vaga jac tome regen aus wrrirai V7 Dis OC A pra Din t li E Y emin Taemin ra 1 TIME Tongia baam al iio mur Turing Pema jeri E 1163 Ein hara Le 250 do DOC whina TT ue Currie rg Torri a
348. onnection P DB Braking resistor Connect the braking resistor option P NG DClink bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals SG Grounding for inverter and motor Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently Analog input voltage input 13 Power supply Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer for the Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ potentiometer The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected 12 Analog setting 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage e 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the current larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Note Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 8 8 1 uj a o amp O Analog input C1 Analog setting current input C1 function Analog setting voltage input V2 function PTC t
349. ontrol I O signal terminals under communications control in Section 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status for details Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm ye When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first Occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VHd3dO 3 4 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the 55 key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the key only when the alarm code is displayed 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the key The item number and data for each run
350. ontrol being canceled Hz PID ON or for a primary reference frequency under the PID dancer control PID command Command Command specified by J02 Multi frequency by C08 Multi frequency by C12 Multi frequency by C16 C08 C12 and C16 can be specified in increments of 1 Hz The following gives the conversion formula between the PID command value and the data to be specified Data to be specified PID command 96 x Maximum frequency F03 100 Data to be specified C08 C12 C16 E Maximum frequency F03 x 100 Manual speed command Selected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 For PID commands refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block C20 Jogging Frequency C20 specifies the frequency to apply in jogging operation Data setting range 0 00 to 400 0 Hz LL For details about jogging inching operation refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function 9 72 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function Disable timer operat
351. ops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Ol u Yes protection IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External alarm Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital 0h2 Yes input input signal THR Electronic In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to 0 1 Yes thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal Ol 2 overload overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range E F10 2 E The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 3 and F12 o a For motor 2 read F10 to F12 as A06 to AO8 H S E z el PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor 0h4 Yes z 2 thermistor protection D a Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals C1 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB c accordingly a ae O Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the inverter m early Is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the Q warning motor O Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting 1s active mE a Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping
352. or 4 pole inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with shaft driven fan 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated motors or motors with forced cooling fan Electronic thermal overload relay for motor 1 Level 0 01 to 99 9 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor DC brake Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable DC braking 1 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s DC brake Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz DC brake Braking level 0 to 100 DC braking 1 Braking level 0 to 100 DC brake Braking time 0 00 to 30 00 s DC braking 1 Braking time 0 00 to 30 00 s Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz S curve acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Liner 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong A 32 Acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Liner 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong FVR E9S App G Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Protective action history Display alarm history of las
353. or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults initialize the whole data using function code H03 data 1 3 14 3 3 Programming Mode Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 5 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default 15 Keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example f n is displayed e deyo 2 Ifanything other than f n is displayed use the and keys to display f n 3 Press the 5x key to proceed to a list of function codes 4 Use the and keys to display the desired function code f OJ in this example then press the key The data of this function code appears In this example data O of f 01 appears 5 Change the function code data using the and keys In this example press the key two times to change data O to 2 6 Press the key to establish the function code data The s aue appears and the da
354. or details refer to the descriptions of function codes E01 to E05 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 2 E codes Terminal functions 3 9 3 3 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output 1 0 signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 7 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 7 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED monitor Main functions Refer to shows Displays only basic function codes to customize Section Quick Setup Q Setup the inverter operation 3 3 1 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function ag Section Data Setting i codes codes enables its 332 data to be E displayed changed High performance functions A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions o codes Optional function Displays only function codes that have
355. or shaft moment of inertia kg m Jz Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in braking or decelerating motor N m TL Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency In the above equation generally output torque tm is negative and load torque t is positive So deceleration time becomes shorter 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 8 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor If the inverter brakes the motor the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to be regenerated into the inverter circuit This regenerative energy is often consumed in so called braking resistors as heat The following explains the braking resistor rating 1 Calculation of regenerative energy In the inverter operation one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated at the time an object is moved by an inertial force Kinetic energy of a moving object When an object with moment of inertia J kg m rotates at a speed N r min its kinetic energy is as J g p gy follows J 2m N gt A E J 7 12 gt 0 g 7 12 1 z JaN J 7 12 1824 Nx J When this object is decelerated to a speed Nj r min the output energy is as follows _J 2x N 2n N 2 E a y J 7 13 ANN 0 7 13 182 4 The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7 9 is calcula
356. or while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage a 4 Migs ey Undervoltage level Siale of the inverter Operation 1 Running Ready to run 1 i Run command OM ON H13 Es Mb operation 2 SH Siral ON Gmetad OFF Sir oy Restarl Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs pid aeny Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA T B Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating th
357. ore than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits e By setting function code C30 to 0 i keys on keypad and selecting frequency command 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the amp Z key You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items motor speed load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 5 or 6 as listed in Table 3 1 3 2 Running Mode E Settings under PID process control To enable the PID process control you need to set function code JO1 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can access manual speed commands frequency command with and keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys LL Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block e deyo Setting the PID process command with and keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 i i Keys on key
358. orque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link circuit voltage Analog output FM Voltage adjustment Function 0 to 200 FMA o Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV DC link bus voltage FMP terminal Pulse rate Voltage adjust Function 300 to 6000 p s at full scale Analog output FM Pulse rate 300 to 6000 p s FMP Pulse rate at 100 output 0 Analog output FM Mode selection 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP 1 to 200 Analog output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 0 to 8 as same as those of F31 A 39 Analog output FM Voltage adjustment Function 1 to 200 FMA FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S 30Ry operation mode 0 The relay 30 excites on trip mode 1 The relay 30 excites on normal mode Terminal 30A B C function 99 Alarm output for any alarm Active ON 1099 Alarm output for any alarm Active OFF Torque limiter 1 Driving Braking 20 to 20096 999 No limit 0926 Automatic deceleration control 20 to 20096 999 No limit Torque limiter 1 Limit
359. ose TTL H05 Reset interval 0 o 5to200 to 20 0 H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation 9 85 1 Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear 9 86 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Cunilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable 9 87 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited H09 i 0 Disable 9 88 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 9 90 H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent 0 Disable Limiting 1 Enable Vode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power E Depending 9 24 Failure on the 9 91 Restart time inverter capacity H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command i i 999 Automatically determined by inverter H26 i Vode selection 0 Disable Y Y 1 Enable With PTC the inverter immediately trips with 0 4 displayed H27 Level H28 A A EA E 9 92 H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command 9 93 Vode selection F01 C30 F02 RS 485 F02 F01 C30 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 option F02 RS 485 option RS 485 F01 C30 RS 485 option RS 485 RS 485 option RS 485 option RS 485 option 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA H42 v 9 94 H43 a A H44 Sta
360. otor 2 F03 F04 FOS F06 F09 F20 F21 F22 F37 F42 A01 A02 A03 A04 AOS A09 A10 A11 A13 A14 Function code for motor 1 Function code for motor 2 H68 H80 P02 PO3 P06 PO7 PO9 P10 P12 P99 A40 A41 A16 A17 A20 A21 A23 A24 A26 A39 Figure 4 3 2 Control Block Output Stage 919017 1OH1NOO HOS SWVHOVIG 0019 lato This page is intentionally left blank 4 10 4 4 Control Block Figures 4 3 1 and 4 3 2 show schematic block diagrams input and output stages respectively that explain the processes in which the inverter drives the motor according to the final run command FWD or REV and the drive frequency command sent from the drive frequency command block or the PID control block Additional and supplemental information is given below The logic shown in the upper left part of the block diagram processes the final reference frequency so that it is inverted x 1 for reverse rotation of the motor or is replaced with 0 zero for stopping the motor If the droop control H28 is enabled the droop characteristics owing a load torque will take effect The rotation direction limiter H08 limits polarity forward or reverse of the final frequency command reference and helps the inverter take effect of anti forward rotation or anti reverse rotation function The acceleration deceleration processor determines the outp
361. ous noises and minimize the wiring distance Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring Srealding Hate steel plate shielding plate staal plate Signal bne Power lire Signal linis in a case of duci In a came af rack Figure A 7 Separate Wiring For the main circuit wiring use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent noise propagation refer to Figure A 8 The shield braided wire of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base common side of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi point connection refer to Figure A 9 The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current but also to block noise penetration and radiation Corresponding to the main circuit voltage the grounding work should be Class D 300 VAC or less grounding resistance 100 or less and Class C 300 to 600 VAC grounding resistance 10 or less Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a grounding point Connactinn DOTA nia Metal conduk pt Metal condi pk Vul indi pire miui pias r gt E Imvarar mE ici meds l Inverter i M coe Cores i T merter port a ae a Y r pula te i r r Ae j e Fi E y T acea tit AT a arat Li pO Ny SS i Corera Menu L Camasa Figure A 8 Grounding of Metal Conduit P
362. output frequency BInIN DIN3HA OL NOILONGOYLNI The current running through the motor on the other hand has a fairly smooth alternating current AC waveform shown on the right hand side Current waveform of Figure 1 23 thanks to the inductance of the motor coil The control block section controls the PWM so as to bring this current waveform as close to a sinusoidal waveform as possible NI SUL JUI PWM voltage waveform Current waveform Figure 1 23 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter For the reference frequency given in the control block the accelerator decelerator processor calculates the acceleration deceleration rate required by run stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated results to the voltage calculator directly or via the dynamic torque vector flux controller whose output drives the PWM block to switch the power gates The FRENIC Multi series features the dynamic torque vector controller with the flux estimator which is always correcting the magnetic flux phase while monitoring the inverter output current as the feedback This feature allows the inverter to always apply the drive power with an optimal voltage and current and consequently respond to quick load variation or speed change The feature also estimates the generated torque of the motor from the estimated flux data and output current to the motor to improve the motor efficiency for matching t
363. pad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E4320 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the key To enable the PID process command to be modified with the 1 key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the 1 key to display the PID process command The lowest digit and its decimal point blinks on the LED monitor 4 To change the PID process command press the key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the via keypad PID process command Also it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered on QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOIL VH3dO P Tip Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID process command SS4 or SS8 ON you still can set the process command using the keypad e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the b key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID process command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit
364. pad forces the inverter er6 Yes protection key to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is priority running by any run commands given via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm er 6 Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays er6 Yes check er 6 on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run function command is present when Powering up An alarm is released the 55 key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters if the tuning has failed or er 7 Yes detection has aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network er Yes communications via the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code er 8 Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the erf Yes during under undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm voltage code RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network erp Yes communications via an optional RS 485 communications card detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an o
365. pected in narrow regions such as between mountains 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced device Tele phone ina common private residence ata distance of 40 m App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Continued Phenomena When driving a ventilation fan with an inverter noise enters a telephone in a private residence at a distance of 40m Possible cause A high frequency leakage current from the inverter and motor flowed to grounded part of the telephone cable shield During the current s return trip it flowed through a grounded pole transformer and noise entered the telephone by electrostatic induction A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter runs the motor The inverter and motor are installed in the same place for overhead traveling ips Lie Power muzply ina apainak Lane Brus if Dire pa Dir n cp pal Gl pholodaectec abr G Yi Panel on ie grand Possible cause It is considered that induction noise entered the photoelectric relay since the inverter s input power supply line and the photoelectric relay s wiring are in parallel separated by approximately 25 mm over a distance of 30 to 40 m Due to conditions of the installation these lines cannot be separated Noise prevention measures 1 Connect the ground terminals of the motors in a common connection Return to the inverter panel
366. play modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only two menus Menu 0 Quick Setup and Menu 1 Data Setting allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 8 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable 0 Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data Checking 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 gt Pressing the key will cycle through the menu With the key you can select the desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 3 14 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter 3 3 Programming Mode Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Multi A function code is displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad in the following format Function Code Group F codes zo m F Ln
367. pos PE angu ey Fher capacitor tor rmdin noise reduction HFMLLINOSKFDLI Lied ja ade Poo km ncm ri Fm NET Cli qm ca NL LL Loud schol kino Op APP HENLE h nd ni Ds Fus Eiei Tachhica Co LEL 81 300 For mini control plas Hori Abarrta eT OA ed A RBS RA rece of rro conc Miri CORRER AAA A AE FH rises ir Fap Espols Tech Da Lk Prequency rating dede haram pa Fo Care Lo deco a Figure 6 1 Quick Overview of Options 6 1 AS Hreartar kaider solar fot Ando Tris satis d cl ba ned incor cades in the Westin or de baci Carra do Waco dl c Lag ABE sores LGB cil Hertsi ty Spaar Daran Daka Corpo Mimordaco card remade soo PG sde can DACESPO Car cud dun sofi gpand corro and on cora Ea mp a cathe in ir rar a PA la Saiit PA fan n Pira ipapply SO Tr irm Dut Sgt Open miede pr coepiamsriany lloran arpa pole bueno H bi ac ipae Din cand OPLE TOEI Lhd m rores ehe pera hiire Io add ee E ad DJ agrahi i ia PE MAUS uri RSS communicatker cad For Denchieg Decus ELLULLTL d CIL ILLUD FT e e PLZ le conti PREM m creo fanc m Tha board am dior da a PCS comrade Wion Bui icis hn PEA 2 Caca The cua CANT qno Le corra Ki Wap aep iuc arising es sCoeeecied unis hoai device Y iver AE MA MORE So ATACA Tora mamu Ded n Dunia t a Board UOPC ET DEV lias ho md change aci Dach the function coon i Lita when Pa pra sappia banshee Bipa Fh DOR or dw i oe mone rea Fus rad cope e sni ire Ij amd
368. pose inverters Application to general purpose inverters 1 Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general purpose appliances Our three phase 200 V class series inverters of 3 7 kW or less FRENIC Multi series were the products of which were restricted by the Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General purpose Appliances established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999 issued by the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry The above restriction however was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004 Since then the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their products We as before recommend that you connect a reactor for suppressing harmonics to your inverter 2 Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Unlike other guidelines this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a general purpose inverter but is applied to each large scale electric power consumer for total amount of harmonics The consumer should calculate the harmonics generated from each piece of equipment currently used on the power source transformed and fed from the high or special high voltage source 1 Scope of regulation In principle the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage T
369. power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Powar failure Racovanyr EXC link bus voltage Lndarvollage level Tere reserved t restart i P5 7 about 0 4 to 0 6 s Stale of the inverter Gale signal DN Ready ta run Run command ON i OON Operation case 1 t i Restart Run command 1 i i Hii Ej Operation case 2 m His i ON 4 Sen ol narmal runnimg 9 26 9 2 Overview of Function Codes If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Pen The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors W Auto restart after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the mot
370. ptional error code er p Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Command loss Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a detected broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 against ms this function stops the inverter output Sun If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function BOURSE invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period Not applicable 8 32 8 7 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload prevention condition alarm code 0 41 or O u the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the erh Yes control printed circuit board control PCB and power printed
371. put Active OFF g deu SNOI VOIJIO3dS RS 485 communications port Connector Functions Classifi RJ 45 Standard RJ 45 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter connector connector supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified for the below The extension cable for remote operation also uses keypad wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 for setting of the terminating resistor 1 Woo GH 1 e Bird 4 Dx 5 DX B NEC l2 S 3 c 3 8 E E o o i 7 HD J ln Taminaling _ 4 vec RI 48 conmactor resistor SW3 p Las connector pan assignmenil Figure 8 9 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment Cia C Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit ea as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts ofthe main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit Th
372. put U V W os fewarson 20 20 20 18 20 20 20 31 20 29 29 39 2 0 2 0 5 0 a N EN S o EN E ah rm 8 0 17 25 Three phase 200V oo w Nin elalelela oi v m m m m ajojojojojo N a O olm m m m oo d o olojlo rs eve is 35 288 5s 427 80 35 35 33 220 140 eo wr rus p so Tss a7 sre seo 720 prac peor 720 puo eo 50 E E 20 0 85 13 2 5 3 7 Three 5 5 3 7 CENT 7E1S 40 20 13 is pewsesan zo pas pus par pes pus 2 pz ss a0 o 24 peo ss os so ss 20 29 24 Ls ewsesin peo Jos zo ze wo ss ss ese so ss zo v 20 05 ae oz roseis 20 20 20 20 20 13 us oa foem zo pas pus pir ps pus pis pia zofo 29 3 0 sl 20 20 20 50 15 mRNi4ETS 20 20 20 16 55 20 20 164 20 20 20 80 11 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 6 4 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals Table 6 2 Cont for DC reactor braking resistor control circuits and inverter grounding EON 2 Recommended wire size mm P1 P
373. quency 400 to 400 Hz Bias Frequency command 1 100 0 to 100 096 FVR E9S s data x 100 Maximum frequency 1 F03 Gain For frequency setting signal 0 00 to 250 Analog input adjustment for 12 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Frequency limiter High 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Frequency limiter Low 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter Low 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Motor characteristics Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor 1 0 00 to 0 40 Usually no change is necessary Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults FMA and FMP terminals Select 0 Analog output FMA 1 Pulse output FMP A 33 Analog output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC EMA 2 Output in pulse FMP FVR E9S FRENIC Multi FUNG kung Data setting range tion Name Data setting range tion Name Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S code code FMA terminal 0 Output frequency Analog output 0 Output frequency 1 Function 1 Output current FM before slip compensation F41 2 Output torque F31 Function 2 Output current 3 Load factor 4 Output torque 5 Load factor FMP terminal 10 to
374. quency SS4 E05 Terminal X5 Function 1003 Select multi frequency SS8 1004 Select ACC DEC time RTI 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI U DI 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor STM speed at starting 1030 Force to stop STOP 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 1042 Reserved 2 1043 Reserved 2 44 1044 Reserved 2 45 1045 Reserved 2 Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 i a 9 18 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft 9 55 6 deu E11 D
375. quipment communications card via No FRENIC Loader supported the terminal port on the card To connect any of the applicable devices follow the procedures shown below 1 Standard keypad and optional multi function keypad The standard keypad and optional multi function keypad allow you to run and monitor the inverter There is no need to set the y codes 2 FRENIC Loader Using your PC running FRENIC Loader you can monitor the inverter s running status information edit function codes and test run the inverters 6 deu LI For the setting of y codes refer to function codes y01 to y10 For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual 3 Host equipment The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and PLC to the inverter Modbus RTU and Fuji general purpose inverter protocol are available for communications protocols Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon Inc S3009 NOILONNA For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b 9 119 m Station address y01 for standard port and y11 for option port y01 and y11 specify the station address for the RS 485 communications link The table below lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges Protocol Station address Broadcast address Modbus RTU protocol 1 to 247 FRENIC Loader protocol 1 to 255 FUJI general purpose inverter protocol 1 to 31
376. r DC voltage The shorter a pulse rise time becomes the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a short wiring length C 2 C 3 irz 1 ius i an SS ose Fa TA ae KJET coreeponds lo Bur a V 01105013 yk f aS CRI p Bipolar transistor comasponds ho E Er v fv el ad E ig Fe m pes v Dit ys E i Ti gr j yr gt Tho case whan an nulput raactor andior a flor Ar a uo _ a A are inserted corresponds lo 25 Pe 77 ir 1 2 q A E Sue vnltagn j Lon E A Voltage i ane Surge volage recrificafon hector 45 ra A E Magnification factor against DC wollage E E p Timbre e io Inverter rmi po Matar kj a y 3 wire 5 Amm cable 20 ET Bb 100 120 14 Cable length m Excerpt from LJ IEE Japan Vol 107 Mo 7 1987 Figure C 2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage Effect of surge voltages The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor terminals and depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation When the motor is driven with a 200 V class inverter the dielectric strength of the insulation is no problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages the DC voltage is only about 300 V But in case of a 400 V class inverter the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the wiring length the surge voltages may greatly increase an
377. r Modbus RTU Q automatically Even parity o 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU S3009 NOILONN 4 m Stop bits y07 and y17 y07 and y17 specify the number of stop bits Data for y07 y dvl7 Stop bit s Setting for FRENIC Loader ind d Loader sets it to 1 bit automatically For the Modbus RTU protocol the stop bits are automatically determined associated with the property of parity bits So no setting is required 9 121 m No response error detection time y08 and y18 y08 and y18 specify the time interval from Data for y08 the inverter detecting no access until it and y18 Function enters communications error alarm mode due to network failure and processes the communications error This applies to a 1 to 60s mechanical system that always accesses its station within a predetermined interval during communications using the RS 485 communications link Disable For the processing of communications errors refer to y02 and y12 m Response interval y09 and y19 y09 and y19 specify the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host equipment such as a PC or PLC to the start of sending the response This function allows using equipment whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response enabling the inverter to send a response timely by the latency time setting Data setting rang
378. r failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage 4 Undervoltage level L 1 1 1 t 74 No power I Time reserved for restart about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command 3 Gate OFF Ready to run State of the inverter e 2 Waiting for run command Run command ON 4 Restart When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run 4 Mate Me command However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence If the Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode
379. r is run with an inverter voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a low frequency region reducing the motor output torque In a low frequency range therefore to increase the motor output torque it is necessary to augment the output voltage This process of voltage compensation is called torque boost Related function codes F09 and A05 Output voltage V Torque boost 0 Output frequency Hz Transistor output A control signal that generates predefined data from within an inverter via a transistor open collector Trip In response to an overvoltage overcurrent or any other unusual condition actuation of an inverter s protective circuit to stop the inverter output V f characteristic A characteristic expression of the variations in output voltage V V and relative to variations in output frequency f Hz To achieve efficient motor operation an appropriate V f voltage frequency characteristic helps a motor produce its output torque matching the torque characteristics of a load Messo V f control The rotating speed N r min of a motor can be stated in an expression as N 120xf 1 P where f Output frequency p Number of poles s Slippage On the basis of this expression varying the output frequency varies the speed of the motor However simply varying the output frequency f Hz would result in an overheated motor or would not allow the motor to demonstrate its optimum utili
380. rage braking torque 150 Allowable duty 5 Allowable Cycle braking properties Allowable continuous braking time Brake unit Not required amp Note This braking resistor is not applicable to three phase 400 V class series and single phase 200 V class series of inverters 6 16 6 4 Selecting Options 2 DC reactors DCRs A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction for reducing harmonic components E For power supply matching Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the rated inverter capacity In this case the percent reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak value increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF UseaDCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2 Max voltage V Min voltage V Interphase voltage unbalance x 67 Three phase average voltage V Bi For input power factor correction for suppressing harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a syste
381. ransfer data Write 1 word Read 1 word Write 50 words Read 50 words Write 41 words Read 41 words Messaging system Polling Selecting Broadca st Command message Transmission character format ASCII Binary Binary Character length 8 or 7 bits selectable by the 8 bits fixed function code 8 bits fixed Parity Even Odd or None selectable by the function code Even fixed Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits selectable by the function code No parity 2 bits 1 bit Even or Odd parity 1 bit Select by parity setting 1 bit fixed Error checking Sum check 5 2 CRC 16 Sum check 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ 45 connector having the following pin assignment Signal name Function Remarks Power source for the keypad 5 V power lines Reference potential Grounding pins Not used No connection RS 485 data Built in terminating resistor 112Q RS 485 data Open close by SW3 IGND Terminaing feito Sua mum Pins 1 2 7 and 8 on the RJ 45 connector are exclusively assigned to power supply and grounding for keypads When connecting other devices to the RJ 45 connector take care not to use those pins Failure to do so may cause a short circuit hazard
382. re 7 7 If the table speed is v m s when the motor speed is Ny r min then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60 v 21 Nw m The moment of inertia of the table and load to the shaft is calculated as follows 60 v eT W W kg m 7 9 2 Calculation of the acceleration time Figure 7 9 shows a general load model Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction gear with efficiency Na The time required to accelerate this load in stop state to a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Jet Mo 2 Nu 0 EET 60 s 7 10 tacc where Ji Motor shaft moment of inertia kg m Jz Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in driving motor N m TL Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency As clarified in the above equation the equivalent moment of inertia becomes J J2 mG by considering the reduction gear efficiency Ji kgem J gsm To y MF Reduction I I Motor shalt momenl Momeni of inertia el inerba Converted lo motor shalt Figure 7 9 Load Model Including Reduction gear 3 Calculation of the deceleration time In a load system shown in Figure 7 9 the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Jit Jo Ng 2n 0 Nw s 7 11 tw tn 60 ene toec where J Mot
383. re and flowrate control In addition an anti reset windup function to prevent PID control overshoot and other PID control functions which can be adjusted easily through PID output limiter integral hold reset signals are provided The PID output limiter and integral hold reset signals can also be used in cases where the inverter is used for dancer control B Operating signal trouble is avoided by the command loss detection function If frequency signals connected to the inverter 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA Multi speed signals communications etc are interrupted the missing frequency commands are detected as a command loss Further the frequency that is output when command loss occurs can be set in advance so operation can be continued even in cases where the frequency signal lines are cut due to mechanical vibrations of the equipment etc i Conadi douane setting Time Figure 1 17 B An overload stop function protects equipment from over operation If the load on equipment suddenly becomes great while controlled by the inverter the inverter can be switched to deceleration stop or to coast to stop operation to prevent damage to the equipment Detection Operation frequency Deceleration stop Coast to stop Figure 1 18 1 1 Features B Continuous equipment operation with overload avoidance control If the fans or pulleys are entangled with foreign material so as to increase the load and cause a sudden temperature rise in the
384. re marked connected in the configuration table Multi monitor Allows you to monitor the status of more than one inverter in a list format Capris Oparalinn sah 115 dphiie gU hib pd 16 Jphise Sire 12 17 5 8 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader 5 2 3 3 Running status monitor The running status monitor offers four monitor functions I O monitor System monitor Alarm monitor and Meter display You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the purpose and situation I O monitor Allows you to monitor the ON OFF states of the digital input signals to the inverter and the transistor output signals e amm Se mes ms System monitor Allows you to check the inverter s system information version model maintenance information etc Alarm monitor The alarm monitor shows the alarm status of the selected inverter In this window you can check the details of the alarm currently occurs and related information D c Z zZ Z O I D O c O I JJ eol K co a Q O c Z gt d O Z Meter display pr Displays analog readouts of the selected inverter mm such as output frequency on analog meters dem The example on the right displays the reference AN i frequency and the output frequency 5 2 3 4 Test running The Test running feature allows you to test run the motor in Run forward or Run reverse while monitoring the running status of the selected inverter
385. rent level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 m Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking m Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Data for H95 Characteristics Slow response Slows the rising edge Insufficient braking torque may result of the current thereby preventing at the start of DC braking reverse rotation at the start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby depending on the moment of inertia accelerating the build up of the of the mechanical load and the braking torque coupling mechanism Dutput fresuency Start of dezelerale In slop Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency Fea DC braking 1 Braking time F22 DG braking 1 D Bralong level 21 e w Time v DC braking Braking response mode Has DC braking currant D AEE 9 2 Overview of Function Codes It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC brakin
386. requency Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 9 86 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor Pore output Acc torque Acc output kW Output frequency Base frequency F04 Output frequency i Maximum frequency The figures at left show the F03 A01 acceleration characteristics Base Similar characteristics apply frequency to the deceleration F04 A02 Time Le Reference Acc time Ci Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the machinery s load torque Rotational Direction Limitation HO8 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss operation of run commands miss polarization of frequency commands or other mistakes 6 deu Data for HO8 Function Disable S3009 NOILONNA Enable Reverse rotation inhibited Enable Forward rotation inhibited 9 87 Starting Mode Auto search H49 Starting Mod
387. ripheral equipment Figure 1 22 Inverters Totally Controlled by POD Global standard compliance e Complies with standards Ec ici OE aro um Sora pde Card C iu LISTED e Sink Source switchable e Wide voltage range e The multi function keypad displays multiple languages Japanese English German French Spanish Italian Chinese and Korean There are two types of multi function keypad 1 2 Control System 1 2 Control System deyo This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the FRENIC Multi series of inverters As shown in Figure 1 24 the converter section converts the input commercial power to DC power by means of a full wave rectifier which charges the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor The inverter portion modulates the electric energy charged in the DC link bus capacitor by Pulse Width Modulation PWM according to the control circuit signals and feeds the output to the motor The PWMed frequency is called the Carrier Frequency The voltage applied to the motor has a waveform modulated by the carrier frequency from the dynamic torque vector flux controller that estimates the optimal PWM signal monitoring the inverter output current feedback as shown on the left hand side PWM voltage waveform of Figure 1 23 The voltage consists of alternating cycles of positive and negative pulse trains synchronizing with the inverter s
388. rminal arrangements and symbols eese nete rennen enne nennen eene A 28 Futiction CODES enine arie aane etd e js A 31 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA April 1994 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields This paper describes the effect that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as inverters as well as introducing noise prevention measures Refer to Section A 3 3 Noise prevention examples for details 1 Effect on AM radios Phenomenon If an inverter operates AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets Probable cause Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter Measures Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective 2 Effect on telephones Phenomenon If an inverter operates nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear Probable cause A high frequency leak
389. rque load A 3 to 31 Constant torque load F09 Torque boost 1 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix Electronic 0 Inactive Electronic 0 00 thermal thermal overload overload relay 2 A07 protection Select for motor 2 Overload F66 detection level 1 Active for 4 pole standard motor Electronic 1 For general purpose motors with shaft thermal driven fan 2 Active for 4 pole inverter motor A06 overload 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated protection motors or motors with forced cooling fan for motor 2 Select motor characteristics Electronic 0 01 to 99 9 Electronic 0 00 Disable thermal thermal 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable overload overload continuous drive current of the motor F67 relay 2 A07 protection Level for motor 2 Overload detection level Slip 0 0 to 5 0 Hz Motor 1 100 0 compensation P09 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 1 100 0 F 68 P11 Slip i compensation gain for braking Motor 1 0 00 to 5 00 Hz P12 Rated slip frequency Torque vector 0 Inactive Control mode 0 Disable V f operation with slip F69 control 1 Active F42 selection 1 compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation A 35 FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Func Func f Data setting range tion Name Data setting range tion Name Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S code code Motor capa
390. rrent Overload Detection Level x 100976 9 23 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure B Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Description Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm U and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip immediately Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm U The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm U is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after recovery from power failure Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure
391. rt Check to make the key priority effective then depressing the tx key forcibly turns off the internal run commands FWD and REV In this case the generator automatically replaces deceleration characteristics of the inverter for that of the linear deceleration regardless of the setting of H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern If the reference frequency is lower than the starting frequency F23 or the stop frequency F25 then the internal run commands will be finally turned off according to the output of run decision logic and the inverter decelerates to stop the motor The inverter is also equipped with the feature that 1f the frequency command specifies a reference frequency lower than that of specified by the lower limiter F16 and H63 the logic turn the run command OFF automatically Further more When the command loss detection is activated due to entering the abnormal frequency command if E65 0 the inverter turns the run command OFF For the timer driven operation once inputting a run command the timer starts countdown the inverter automatically turns OFF the internal run command after the time elapsed and releases the hold function in the keypad at same time When the overload stop facility is enabled and an overload is detected the inverter turns the run command OFF depending on data of the function code J65 To restart the inverter operation once turn the run command OFF and it ON again 4 7 919017 1OH1NOO HOS SWVH
392. rtup Times of Motori indication of cumulative startup times Y v H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable Y 9 95 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically retums to 9 99 0 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus icati i i i i 9 95 Capacitor H48 H49 9 88 9 95 H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 0 1 9 16 Frequency O 9 95 H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Noninear V f Pattern 2 Frequency m dia AAA PP 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series NN LL TT YL Jogging operation ACC time and DEC time are common H56 j Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 3600 oot s v v 600 9 96 H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 N Y 1 Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing run command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to run Y Y 9 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency 9 m o 96 limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low regere 0 1 to 60 0 o 96 H code continued Code H68 H69 H70 H71 H76 H80 H89 H90 H91 H94 H95 H96 H97 H98 Data setting range Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or
393. s device When operating an inverter noise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 kHz lt Possible cause gt The AM radio may receive noise radiated from wires at the power supply and output sides of the inverter When operating an inverter noise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 kHz Pou 1 inmiikarmer i a 7 Possible cause The AM radio may receive noise radiated from the power line at the power supply side of the inverter A 8 Noise prevention measures 1 Install an LC filter at the power supply side of the inverter In some cases a capacitive filter may be used as a simple method 2 Install a metal conduit wiring between the motor and inverter Carms Fire Note Minimize the distance between the LC filter and inverter as short as possible within 1m 1 Install inductive filters at the input and output sides of the inverter Power Supply L3 reece iat F aiia ni Faro nml The number of turns of the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as large as possible In addition wiring between the inverter and the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as short as possible within 1m When further improvement is necessary install LC filters 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced 2 The conduction noise to the power supply side can be reduced Note Sufficient improvement may not be ex
394. s FM and 11 of the inverter to measure the frequency component selected by function code F31 Figure 6 14 shows the dimensions of the frequency meter and a connection example Model TRM 45 10 VDC 1 mA 45 8 5 famas M3 1 a A Unit mm L 3 AT avaiable from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model FM 60 10 VDC 1 mA 41 FI 35 in pp 4 1 5 Cower option Unit mm Available from Fuji Electric Technica Oo Ltd Inverter Frequency es FM meter i 11 Figure 6 14 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example 6 26 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors Contents TA Selecting Motors and Inyerters recep ete s 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics ener nnne nennen nns 7 1 JT 1 2 Selection procedure ete A e ea 7 4 la Equations tor selections obo oe ER OHIO eiae tu Ur ut t Diss 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 0 00 eceecceeceeeceseceseceseceeecaeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 7 7 A Geteraliequatiott Ln d 17 2 Obtaining the required force Feierei
395. s Providing noise filters at the input and output terminals is also an effective measure A 1 A 2 Noise This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to noise 1 Inverter noise Figure A 1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration The inverter converts AC to DC rectification in a converter unit and converts DC to AC inversion with 3 phase variable voltage and variable frequency The conversion inversion is performed by PWM implemented by switching six transistors IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor etc and is used for variable speed motor control Switching noise is generated by high speed on off switching of the six transistors Noise current 1 is emitted and at each high speed on off switching the noise current flows through stray capacitance C of the inverter cable and motor to the ground The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows i C dv dt It is related to the stray capacitance C and dv dt switching speed of the transistors Further this noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors are switched on or off In addition to the main circuit of the inverter the DC to DC switching power regulator DC DC converter which is the power source for the control circuit of the inverter may be a noise source in the same principles as stated above The frequency band of this n
396. s or motors with forced cooling fan Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Level 20 to 13596 of the inverter rated current in Ampere Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 20 to 13596 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 min Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 0 min Torque vector control 2 0 Inactive 1 Active Control mode selection 2 0 Disable V f operation with slip compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation Motor 2 Number of poles Capacity Rated current Tuning On line tuning No load current 9c R1 setting X setting compensation control 2 compensation response time 0 01 to 5 50 kW 3 7 kW or less 0 01 to 11 0 kW 5 5 7 5 kW 0 00 to 99 9 A 0 1 2 0 1 0 00 to 99 9 A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 0 01 to 10 00 s A 46 Motor 2 No of poles No load current Rated slip frequency compensation response time 2 to 22 0 01 to 11 0 kW 0 00 to 100 00 A 0 1 2 0 1 0 00 to 50 00A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz Set A23 and A25 to 100 0 01 to 10
397. s A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Note 2 The OFL 4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency 6 20 6 4 Selecting Options Inverter Output circuit filter OFL Figure 6 11 External View of Output Circuit Filter OFL and Connection Example 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv 3Hdl 3d ONILOQ T3S 6 21 5 Zero phase reactor for reducing radio noise ACL An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the power supply lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply lines if it is more than 20 m insert it to the power output lines of the inverter Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size 1 D and installation requirements ACL AU0B ACL 74B F200160 Unit mm MCCB MC Power supply 1 Inverter With overcurrent protection Figure 6 12 Dimensions of Zero phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise ACL and Connection Example Table 6 12 Zero phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise ACL Zero phase reactor Installation requirements Wire size type Qty Number of turns mm 2 0 1 4 3 5 ACL 40B 5 5 8 2 2 14 8 i 14 ACL 74B 5 2
398. s digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to HO9 Starting mode W Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm er 6 displayed m Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor m Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning this terminal command ON holds the integral components of the PID processor m Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Tip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Tip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Acceleration Time 2 F07 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 2 F08 Deceleration Time 1 Refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 and F08 Torque Limiter 2 Limi
399. s y 1 P ae I Y i Pei sv En pi u NE Lum HA By LED segment ONIOFF m H Tan ui LU ja O status in binary format aa EEE A E E 3 input states in hax format Quiput status in hex Tormal qum i un By LED segment ON OFF SE VO ttum in binary format Input status in hax format Gulput status in hax format n i uq oe lal ou Input voltage at terminal 12 v 1 Pal xs L A m a y a cnp PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Ha A Qi mum Figure 3 8 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking 3 21 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Tum the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the 55 key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and Keys to display I O Checking _ 0 3 Press the 5x key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 4 00 4 Use the and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4_ 00 or 4_ 01 using the and 6 keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 15 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 16 5 Press the key to return to a list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 14 I O Check Items LED monitor Description shows
400. se calculate the maximum equivalent RMS current value effective value of current not to exceed the allowable value rated current for the motor 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 Equations for selections 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 1 General equation The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated Calculation for driving a load along a straight line with the motor is shown below Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed v m s is F N and the motor speed for driving this is Nw r min the required motor output torque tw N m is as follows 60 v F MA 2 Te Nu Nc N m 7 1 where nag is Reduction gear efficiency When the inverter brakes the motor efficiency works inversely so the required motor torque should be calculated as follows 60 v _ F Nom 3 2 Tm 2 TT Nu Nc 60 0 2c Ny in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed v m s around the motor shaft deyo The value F N in the above equations depends on the load type 2 Obtaining the required force F Moving a load horizontally A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 7 7 If the mass of the carrier table is Wo kg the load is W kg and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is u then the friction force F N is expressed as follows which is equal to a required force for
401. se 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 8 3 2 2 Control circuit terminals The control circuit terminal arrangement screw sizes and tightening torque are shown below CN SN CC CELEI DEE Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nm Table 8 3 Control Circuit Terminals Screwdriver type Allowable wire size Wire strip length Ferrule terminal for Europe type terminal block Tm Flat screwdriver AWG26 to AWG16 0 6x3 5mm 0 14to1 5mm O HO qom Manufacturer of ferrule terminals Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to the table below Table 8 4 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Type With insulated collar Without insulated collar Screw size AWG24 0 25 mm AI0 25 6BU AWG22 0 34 mm AI0 34 6TQ AWG20 0 5 mm AI0 5 6WH Samm AWGIS 0 75 mm AI0 75 6GY Head thickness 0 6 mm AWGI6 1 25 mm AIL S 6BK Screwdriver head style 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 4 1 Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 8 5 Operating environment Table 8 5 Environmental Requirements Item Specifications Site location Indoors Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Note 1 Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive ga
402. se edition only for details The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Type 52 4 0 for magnetic contactor ES 10 411 Lead wire MDti 3011 e ly i p r a ae Hi E HaT AP R 2 Type 51 8 0 far mins contral relay or timer 3 E 8 131 Les wire 202 1 T Fl f 9 i ID r F EH 1 pe m E T us E A J Unit mm able from Fuji Elecirie Technica Co Lid Figure 6 5 Surge Absorber Dimensions LNAWdINOA IVI3HdAlY3Id ONILOQ T3S 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment options 1 Braking resistors A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter LL Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 1 1 Standard model The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink of the resistor and outputs a digital ON OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level as an overheating warning signal To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals of the FRENIC Multi assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV Connect the assigned terminals to terminals 1 and 2 of the braking resistor Upon detection of the warning signal preset detection l
403. select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 7 9 deyo LNAWdINOA Tv33Hdl id ONILOQ3 T3S 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and magnetic contactor MC 1 1 Functional overview E MCCBs and ELCBs With overcurrent protection Molded Case Circuit Breakers MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power supply and inverter s main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase or L1 L and L2 N for single phase power supply from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs Built in overcurrent overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its input output lines E MCs An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter the MC can also switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines At the power supply side Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply generally commercial factory power lines with the protective function bu
404. sen ii iiir hire Hed 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation 7 8 1 Calculation of moment of inertia nennen ener nnne eren nennen 7 8 2 Calculation of the acceleration time esses ener entere 7 10 3 Calculation of the deceleration time sse ener 7 10 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor 7 11 1 Calculation of regenerative ENCTYY coococnnocnoonnonnnnnconnconncnn nono nonn non ron n nro nro n nro nennen nnne 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor sese enne 7 12 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor eese eene enne nn nnne nre n rr nn rennen nnne 7 13 Fal Select On procedure e eed eie eit ite te A ene 7 13 42 27 Notes OM Select Once sse A RU e E Aa REN HS 7 13 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters When selecting a general purpose inverter first select a motor and then inverter as follows 1 Key point for selecting a motor Determine what kind of load machine is to be used calculate its moment of inertia and then select the appropriate motor capacity 2 Key point for selecting an inverter Taking into account the operation requirements e g acceleration time deceleration time and frequency in operation ofthe load machine to be driven by the motor selected in 1 above calculate the acceleration deceleration braking torque This section describes the selection procedure for
405. sensor signals are connected to a common point in the system Conduction noise from the inverter can be reduced This is an example of a measure where the power line and signal line cannot be separated Induction noise and radiation noise at the output side of the inverter can be reduced Total conduction noise and induction noise in the electric line can be reduced App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage Disclaimer This document provides you with a translated summary of the Guideline of the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market B 1 Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for suppressing harmonic noise in September 1994 1 Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general purpose appliances 2 Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing these guidelines are to establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the power source These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial power lines and generate harmonic current This section gives a description limited to general pur
406. ses flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm2 or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa g deu Vibration aud Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 02 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz C 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz Q 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz 9 op Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them 3 7 4 0 kW or less the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the panel of your system or other dustproof containers Note 3 Ifyou use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 8 6 Table 8 6 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Altitude Output current derating factor 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 8 4 2 8 4 2 1 Storage environment Temporary storage Store
407. signals to be output to analog pulse output terminals FM Combination of function code F29 data and selection of the hardware switch SW6 on the interface PCB specifies a property of the analog pulse output FM terminal for an analog voltage or a pulse train To select information to be transferred to the analog pulse output terminal FM use the function code F31 For its analog output voltage output the function code F30 can define the full scale of the output that just matches with the full scale of the connected voltmeter in the external equipment For the pulse train output the function code F33 defines rate of the output pulse count s for the 100 output matching resolution of the counter connected in the external equipment Setting function code F31 to 10 Universal AO enables data output from the host equipment via the communications link on FM The calibration analog output F31 14 refers to an output of the FM s full scale voltage or pulse that adjusts the scale of the connected meter 4 19 919017 1OHINOO HOW SWVHOVIG 2018 aio Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details Contents 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication seisce isei terreina ener enne trennen on noia nnne nan trennen enne 5 1 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications sta
408. st recent darmi code THM s EI al Same as above n a J i Eg Xe i Eh Aes nd recent alarm coda Same aa above El d Es 2 tL cer ard recent alarm coda s Ft CO a Same as above Es 38 M O EE Ee WI i List of alam codes Running status info at the timo an alarm occurred Figure 3 11 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 33 O e m gt O Z c 9 z o I m A m lt U 2 o Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Contents Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings eese enne 4 Drive Frequency Command Block nsei oss osetrene nesei a rE NEE EEEE nennen trennen nennen ens 4 2 Drive Command Block SA SEAS 4 6 Control Bloc Ease a e SAE EE E SO aos 4 8 PID Process Control Block S eet rrr n re Eae eA E E E ER R peier 4 12 PID Dancer Control Block cui aaa dc tad 4 16 EM Output Select muii ia ad a ertet eru 4 19 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings FRENIC Multi series of inverters is equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor operations required in your system Refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details of the function codes The function codes have functional relationship each other
409. stems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo cho Bldg 5 7 Nihonbashi Odemma cho Chuo ku Tokyo 103 0011 Japan Phone 81 3 5847 8011 Fax 81 3 5847 8172 Information in this manual is subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 2006 3 C06 C06 CM 10 FIS
410. stment for 12 Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Polarity To use terminal 12 with an input 10 to 10 VDC set this function code data to 0 If C35 1 a minus component of the input will be regarded as 0 VDC inside the inverter Data for C35 Polarity Input range allowable to terminal 12 Bipolar 10 to 10 VDC Unipolar 0 to 10 VDC 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C37 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C42 Analog I
411. t la Pe koe onmia hia pem rating la ther loss parm sible r gtry teeni pocsleralion ane deceleraon Y Coe 0 exem Figure 7 3 Selection Procedure 7 4 1 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters Calculating the load torque during constant speed running For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 1 It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running becomes higher than the load torque To perform capacity selection efficiently it is necessary to match the rated speeds base speeds of the motor and load To do this select an appropriate reduction gear mechanical transmission ratio and the number of motor poles If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted the tentative capacity can apply as a defined capacity Calculating the acceleration time For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 2 When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time calculate it according to the following procedure 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Calculate the moment of inertia for the load referring to Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation For the motor refer to the related motor catalogs 2
412. t four alarms Refer to Menu 6 Starting frequency 0 1 to 15 Hz Starting frequency 1 0 2 1 0 to 15 0 Hz Torque limiter During acceleration deceleration 0 No limit Active 20 to 18096 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving 20 to 180 999 Disable Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for braking 20 to 180 999 Disable Terminal X5 function 14 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving 20 to 200 999 Disable Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable Terminal Y2 function 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Note Short circuit between terminals X5 and Y2 and between CM and CME Torque limiter During constant speed 0 No limit Active 20 to 18096 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving 20 to 180 999 Disable Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for braking 20 to 180 999 Disable Terminal X5 function 14 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving 20 to 200 999 Disable Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable Terminal Y2 function 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Note Short circuit between terminals X5 and Y2 and between CM and CME Braking torque 0 Braking torque Low 1 Braking torque High Bias fre
413. t from the Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and 8 6 2 Running the inverter by terminal commands The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with terminal commands Pote Z1 MOCE Power ELCa Threo phasol single phase 200 to 240 V a 50 50 Hz or ire a l 300 lo 4 50 Y Poi Pili 5I Hz E TS Vs a a se m d P Grounding terminal eb Hote 55 Poteniiometer posar runoly Voltage ior fer sahing DCO Io t0 Vv ri 4 Analog Curnanbvoliaga input lor going DC 4 10 20 mALDCO to 10 Y Digi input MOCE Malded agsa cirmudt breaker ELCA Earth lankage crei braaker M Magnet contaci DOOR DC reactor DER Grking raain m pr Note 8 Hole ap MC la m 114 Lars So tal 112 11 T jr 8 28 etl ICM 1 T pa pet p best IM DER Irwin REV TAR iota di FT 708 VT Hana Pl DB Ni Control circuit PTC SWB ca l WT We FR aac A 208 Anm output i 30 T3DA ffor any f FMF SVG til rz Transistor output sik EMO SOURCE Sw R5485 port loption Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 8 6 Connection Diagrams When connecting an optiona
414. t function Fiter O limiter O O O IZ gt x 7l N p TN m ro C41 C1 Va funcion Gain Bias AA 12 O cil eto Hu ginis 9 Offset Hardware PTC thermistor switch ode selection 69 SW8 ON H26 1 210 oo O E Aralm m 0h4 H27 Compa UP DOWN control PTC therristor rator Initial frequency setting Level H61 UP command UP UP DOWN DOWN control command DOWN gt UP DOWN gt control PID IRL Gain Bias command via D I O card O O D I O card OC CED communications input terminal option ol 3 cae X ca4 C51 cs2 O gt x o 0 n euet C1 C1 function Pulse train e PG card PG card 2 PID input terminal option ond 3 feedback i amount LG a aoe ec C1 V2 function 1 Gain C37 X C39 3 cain Bids cs7 X ese OFF if y98 1 3 i 5 Standard keypad or H30 4 5 8 ERST gt x RJ 45 port RS 485 Host equipment oo Frequency command via OFF if y98 1 3 communications or H30 1 3 7 RS 485 2 Host equipment communications Y option card li S805 O vd OFF if a 2 H30 1 3t0 5 Last Host equipment command up 78 Field bus option card So to take effect Figure 4 4 1 PID Process Control Block Input Stage 4 12 4 5 PID Process Control Block Enable communications link Select multi trequency Cancel PID control via RS 485 or field bus 81 582 HEAD LE Under PID control Inverter running 4 PID CTL RUN Frequency limiter
415. t i ove 3 9 3 2 4 Jogging Operatlon mai 3 9 3 3 Programming Modern 3 10 3 3 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup sese 3 12 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting coccnnnnncnncnncnononononcnnnononncnncnnonononcnnonacancrnnnnos 3 16 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking esee 3 17 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring seeeeseeeeeree eene 3 18 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking eese eene 3 21 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information sees 3 26 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information gt coccnicnonocononnononnnnncnncnonononnnonnoncnnnonos 3 29 34 Alam Mode o eO EE p UR D be Ah cpi i e aes pete ips 3 32 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode eese 3 32 3 42 Displaying the alarm history eite tdeo pnta E tpi e RO nb ree EE RA 3 32 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm sese 3 32 3 4 4 Switching to Programming mode essent nennen nren nennen enne nee innen 3 32 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Multi features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also
416. t to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage Refer to this manual Appendix B for details on this guideline Safety precautions Read this manual and the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SIA7 1094 E thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the product and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual AW ARN ING Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to A CAUTI ON dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times ANCAUTION This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend Consult your Fuji Electric representative before considering the FRENIC Multi series of inverters for equipment and
417. ta will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example f 02 QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOLIVH3dO Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the 55 key to return to the menu from the function code list Tip Cursor movement Youcan move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the 55 key for second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Power ON T Running mode lai ren faa os T 1 List of function codes Funcbon code data i de T EG nas o og D 323 y Programming E moda e paa E fae L H FO bet E Hs x WIR TEUER E ER jr gt 2 limes Fie pt SALE o c TUE de DAR Saws data and ge te the next Rincon code Figure 3 5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode Basic key operation For details of the
418. take effect Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details The frequency limiter Low F16 helps user select the inverter operation for either the output frequency is held at data of the frequency limiter lower or the inverter decelerates to stop the motor with reference frequency data of 0 by specifying the lower limiter select H63 4 5 919017 1OH1NOO HOS SWVHOVIG 2018 Marito 4 3 Drive Command Block ZLY Se z4 peas Z 10 0W 104 SIrejop 10 d87t H3A nue s Jasr uone iuruuo Gr SY eui 0 jejed sepoo uorouny pere e1 uomeorunuJuJ00 ase sopoo S JON uq peufisse y jo enje eui sindino peubisse jon Josseo0Jd A3H be Josseo04d ava be uondo uoee 104 enueu uomnonujsul ay 0 Jajas suondo eui Jo sirejep 104 Zy 86 863 NO siossaoo1d y 4q El UG 90S 104 age NIL py JOU spol uonoojes epo Je e uonoejeq enjeA uonoejeq dois uoisioep peono pueuiuoo Aguanbas e ug dOLS dois 0 62104 uonounj xui jpeo uonouny xul suoijeoiunuiuoo 7 La ama 3x ommo zina wie 8019 E Z OEH ow pex iya owpexu orug EX ii x ex ix iov pueuiuioo ung Stila vr ua trig O pieo uondo snq pia juaudinba SoH e puewwoo se ig p4eo uondo 8 suomeoiunuiuoo juauidinba 1s0H 2 S8r Sd va V S Z 0 H 10 ug Z
419. tching between normal and inverse operations refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 Selecting Feedback Terminals For feedback control determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output f the sensor is a current output type use the current input terminal C1 of the inverter Tf the sensor is a voltage output type use the voltage input terminal 12 of the inverter or switch over the terminal C1 to the voltage input terminal and use it LL For details refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63 9 105 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA Application example Process control The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0 through 100 For the given feedback input determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input Example Set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 200 in order to make the maximum value 5 V of the external sensor s output correspond to 10096 Note that the input specification for terminal 12 is 0 to 10 V corresponding to 0 to 10096 thus a gain factor of 200 10 V 5 x 100 should be specified Note also that any bias setting must not apply to feedback control Feedback A 100 0 Input at terminal 12 Application examples Dancer control E
420. tected Frequency FDT Time 37 ELIE 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level Overload Early Warning Current Detection Timer Current Detection 2 Level Current Detection 2 Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID and Current detected 2 ID2 output signals m Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code O 1 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data 7 to any of the digital output terminals m Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ID or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the ID or ID2 turns OFF Minimum width
421. ted from the reduction gear efficiency ngand motor efficiency twas follows Besa ith Mo ev N2 D 7 14 SAILIOVdVO H31H3ANI ANY HOLOW IVINILAO SNILOATSS MSIE 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor the motor current fluctuates largely and enters the short time rating range of the motor repeatedly Therefore you have to review the allowable thermal rating of the motor The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the square of the motor current Ifan inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor calculate the equivalent RMS current as mentioned below and select the motor so that this RMS current will not exceed the rated current of the motor Motor speed E te tz Gh amp i E Load torque Acceleration and Iul deceleration torque MIA Motor required 3 _ 51 torque La Load curent Figure 7 10 Sample of the Repetitive Operation First calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern Then using the torque current curve of the motor convert the torque to the motor current The equivalent RMS current Ieq can be finally calculated by the following equation 2 ttt 14 tat Is ots A 7 15 tit tet ta t t ts te The torque current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for
422. temperature of 40 C or lower Select an MCCB and or ELCB suitable for the actual short circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems For the selection of the MC type it is assumed that the 600 V HIV allowable ambient temperature 75 C wires for the power input output of the inverter are used If an MC type for another class of wires is selected the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken into account Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter use an MCCB and or ELCB with the rated current listed in the above table Do not use an MCCB or ELCB with a rating higher than that listed 6 10 6 3 Peripheral Equipment Table 6 5 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of ELCBs with overcurrent protection and wiring length of the inverter output circuits Note that the sensitivity levels listed in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor Table 6 5 Rated Current Sensitivity of Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers ELCBs Nominal Power applied Wiring length and current sensitivity supply motor voltage kW 300 m Three phase 200 V 200 mA Three phase 400 V 500 mA
423. tential capability of the inverter to meet it for the individual power system applications Gain for frequency setting A frequency setting gain enables varying the slope of the output of the frequency set with an analog input signal Related function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that enables the inverter section to switch high voltage current DC power in very high speed and to output pulse train Interphase unbalance A condition of an AC input voltage supply voltage that states the voltage balance of each phase in an expression as Interphase voltage unbalance 76 Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V Inverse mode operation A mode of operation in which the output frequency lowers as the analog input signal level rises Jogging operation A special operation mode of inverters in which a motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a slower speed than usual operating modes Related function codes C20 and H54 Jump frequencies Frequencies that have a certain output with no change in the output frequency within the specified frequency band in order to skip the resonance point of a machine resonance frequency Related function codes C01 to C04 Keypad operation To use a keypad to run an inverter Line speed Running speed of an object e g conveyor driven by the mo
424. ter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop S3009 NOILONNA The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter LL For details of auto tuning refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual INR SI47 1094 E Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Motor 1 Online tuning A19 Motor 2 Online turning The primary and secondary resistances R1 and R2 will change as the motor temperature rises PO5 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation online P07 P08 Motor 1 No load current P12 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency A20 Motor 2 No load current Motor 1 R1 A21 Motor 2 R1 Motor 1 X A22 Motor 2 X P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters Bi No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer E R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression sR1 RL Cable RI 100 9 V 3x1 where R1 Primary r
425. terface PCB Data for F29 Output form Voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA function Pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP function B Voltage adjustment F30 dedicated to FMA F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 6 deu i Fa0 200 F30 100 FI0 50 Cut af scalp t 4 em o 1 c m Z p O 2 E 2 8 Ei O O LL U LL m B M E a F B ml Le AA ia 5055 10034 200 30008 Matar scala B Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal FM Data FM output Function Meter scale for F31 P Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency of the Output frequency inverter before slip compensation Maximum frequency Equivalent to the motor F03 A01 synchronous speed Output frequency after slip compensation Output frequency of the Maximum frequency inverter F03 A01 Output current RMS of the inverter Output voltage RMS of 250 V for 200 V class series the inverter 500 V for 400 V class series Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Output current Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage Load factor Load factor Equivalent to the indication Twice the rated motor load of the load meter Twice the rated output of the Input power Input power of the inverter purp purp inverter PID feedback Feedback amou
426. the analog frequency command as specified 6 deu When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 100 96 or higher the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 1 S3009 NOILONNA The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 Terminal FWD Function E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function Terminal REV Function E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function For details about command assignment to terminals FWD and REV refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 9 69 9 2 3 C01 to C03 C04 C codes Control functions Jump Frequency 1 2 and 3 Jump Frequency Hysteresis width These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery While you are increasing the reference frequency the moment the reference frequency reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency When you are decreasing the reference frequency the situation will be reversed When
427. the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below Storage E 25 to 70 C Table 8 7 Storage and Transport Environments Item Specifications temperature Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or Relative 5 to 95 2 condensation or freezing humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa during storage pressure 70 to 106 kPa during transportation Assuming a comparative short time storage e g during transportation or the like 2 Evenifthe humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Q 3 8 4 2 2 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed above wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage If the inverter is to be stored in a high humidity environment put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 Long term storage The long term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage site Ge
428. ti function keypad to the RJ 45 port allows you to mount the keypad on a panel located far from the inverter enabling remote operation The maximum length of the extension cable is 20 m B Operation by FRENIC Loader The Windows based PC can be connected to the standard RS 485 communications port via a suitable converter Through the RS 485 communications facility you may run FRENIC Loader on the PC to edit the function code data and monitor the running status information of the inverter E Control via host equipment You can use a personal computer PC or a PLC as host higher level equipment and through it control the inverter as its subordinate device Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol compliant to the protocol established by Modicon Inc that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji general purpose inverter protocol that supports the FRENIC Multi and conventional series of inverters Ci Connecting the keypad automatically switches to the keypad protocol there is no need to modify the function code setting When using FRENIC Loader which requires a special protocol for handling Loader commands you need to set up some communication function codes accordingly For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Further another RS 485 communications port can be added by mounting an optional RS 485 Communications Card onto the FRENIC Multi inverter This additional commun
429. tic deceleration t Main control d block 1 Run Limit decision O level Cancel if H69 0 Mode selection H69 Restart mode after momentary power failure H14 Frequency fall rate qno Current limiter Level Current limit control Current limiter Run Output current decision Cancel if Current limiter F43 0 Mode selection Slip compensation giro Control mode selection 1 response time ha analyzer Slip compensation 1 x va O O Calculated torque Slip compensation gain for driving Rated slip frequency i Q Ix Braking Figure 4 3 1 Control Block Input Stage 4 4 Control Block Power Rectifier DC link bus capacitor T o I Cooling fan Motor Cooling fan Gate drive circuit Output current ON OFF lu Iv Iw control AS SEP Lo Instantaneous overcurrent Alarm Qc1 to 0c3 limiting Mode selection Comparator Current limit Output Current lu Iv Iw Current limit level processing Maximum frequency 1 Base frequency 1 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 Maximum output voltage 1 pe Torque boost 1 pa Load selection Auto torque boost Auto saving operation 1 Control mode selection 1 Ciequeney 50 Non linear V f pattern 1 Frequency nigh Voltage Edc FE Non li
430. ting level for driving F40 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for driving s pg E17 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for braking F41 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for braking Refer to the descriptions of function codes F40 and F41 Terminal Y1 Function Terminal Y2 Function E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 E21 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems foe When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validit
431. tion codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 9 5 E code continued Default Refer to Code Data setting range E setting page E29 9 60 E30 E31 Frequency Detection FDT Detection level E32 Hysteresis width O A 0 to 400 0 E34 Overload Early Waming Current 100 of the 9 61 Detection motor rated Level 0 00 Disable A current Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current E85 Time 00110600001 foo s v v 00 E37 Current Detection 2 Level 0 00 Disable 0 01 A Y Y1 100 of the Current value of 1 to 20096 of the inverter rated current Y2 motor rated current E38 Timer pr lea E39 9 62 E40 E41 i E42 T T 7 e 5 pupa E Y p 8 9 63 E43 LED Monitor Item selection 0 Speed monitor select by E48 Y Y 9 64 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 13 Timer 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 21 Reserved 2 22 Reserved 2 E45 LCD Monitor 3 Item selection 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide Y Y 9 65 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection 0 Japanese Y Y Table A 4 9 66 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 DX E47 Contrast control piono vto o _ rt s E4
432. tion performance of the motor cooling fan 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time Curves b and c in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve b shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current in a short time the output torque is 15096 for one minute when torque vector control is enabled At that time the motor cooling characteristics have little effect on the output torque Curve c shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is used to increase the short time maximum torque In this case the short time torque is 20 to 3096 greater than that when the standard capacity inverter is used 3 Starting torque around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 4 Braking torque Curves d e and f in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 In braking the motor kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor of the inverter Discharging this electrical energy to the braking resistor produces a large braking torque as shown in curve e If no braking resistor is provided however only the motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque becomes smaller as shown in curve d When an optional braking resistor is used the braking torque is allowable onl
433. tion related options as well 3 3 Programming Mode m Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DI O interface card The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional DI O interface card just like the control circuit terminals Table 3 17 lists the assignment between LED segments and DI O signals Table 3 17 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment e deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOLLVEIdO LED No LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input DII2 DI11 DI1O DIS DIS DI7 DI6 DIS DIA DI3 DI2 DII DIO terminal Output DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DOO terminal 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 18 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3 9 shows the menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance information Power ON Running mode i t i i t I t mode t 1 Fac List of maintenance items Maintenance info i t 1 1 OHIO ie 1 L 1 AB DATA SEHE gt 5 Dn gt n uan Cumulativ
434. to JO2 setting it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog input specified by any of E61 to E63 function code data 3 For details refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63 Terminal command UP DOWN Using the UP or DOWN command in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA In addition to J02 setting it is necessary to assign UP and DOWN commands to any of terminals X1 through X5 with E01 through E05 function code data 17 18 For details of UP DOWN operation refer to the assignment of the UP and DOWN commands Command via communications link Use function code S13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 10096 maximum frequency of the PID command For details of the communications format refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b e Other than the remote command selection by J02 the multi frequency C08 4 specified by SS4 and SS8 terminal commands can also be selected as a preset value for the PID command Calculate the setting data of the PID command using the expression below PID command data Preset multi frequency Maximum frequency x 100 e In dancer control JO1 3 the setting from the keypad interlocks with data
435. to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 and C1 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the IVS terminal command determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 Final operation Normal 0 Normal operation Inverse Inverse 1 Inverse operation Normal When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter The Cancel PID control terminal command Hz PID can switch the PID control between enabled process is to be controlled by the PID controller and disabled process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting In either case the combination of the PID control J01 or Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the ZVS command determines the final operation as listed below When the PID control is enabled The normal inverse operation selection for the PID controller output reference frequency is as follows PID control Mode selection JO1 IVS Final operation OFF Normal 1 Enable normal operation ON Inverse Inverse 2 Enable inverse operation Normal When the PID control is disabled The normal inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as follows Selection of
436. tor The unit is meter per minute m min Messo Load shaft speed Number of revolutions per minute r min of a rotating load driven by the motor such as a fan Main circuit terminals Power input output terminals of an inverter which includes terminals to connect the power supply motor DC reactor braking resistor and other power components Maximum frequency The output frequency commanded by the input of the maximum value of a frequency setup signal for example 10 V for a voltage input range of 0 to 10 V or 20 mA for a current input range of 4 to 20 mA Related function codes F03 and A01 Modbus RTU Communication protocol used in global FA network market which is developed by Modicon Inc USA Momentary voltage drop immunity The minimum voltage V and time ms that permit continued rotation of the motor after a momentary voltage drop momentary power failure Multi frequency selection To preset frequencies up to 15 stages then select them at some later time using external signals Related function codes E01 to E05 C05 to C19 Nominal applied motor Rated output in kW of a general purpose motor that is used as a standard motor listed in tables in Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT and Chapter 8 SPECIFICA TIONS Overload capability The overload current that an inverter can tolerate expressed as a percentage of the rated output current and also as a permissible energizatio
437. tronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm D even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes 9 39 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models m External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below respectively Intermittent braking Braking resistor COHDANSHS braking Period Less than Power 8 100 braking torque
438. ty if the output voltage V V remains constant For this reason the output voltage V must be varied with the output frequency f by using an inverter This scheme of control is called V f control Variable torque load A squared torque load is characterized by 1 A change in the required torque in proportion to the square of the number of revolutions per minute 2 A power requirement that decreases in proportion to the cube of the decrease in the number of revolutions per minute Required power kW Rotating speed r min x Torque N m 9 55 Related function code F37 and A13 Applications Fans and pumps Required torque N m Required power kW Rotating speed of load machine Required power o Required torque Voltage and frequency variations Variations in the input voltage or frequency within permissible limits Variations outside these limits might cause an inverter or motor to fail High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi User s Manual First Edition April 2006 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this manual is to provide accurate information in the handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Sy
439. ugh route Z As shown in route 3 some conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires Power supply Figure A 3 Conduction Noise 2 Induction noise When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing noise will be induced into those wires and signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction Figure A 4 or electrostatic induction Figure A 5 This is called induction noise i Power T Ireerter ad M mu i i Mr 1 ur pay FA E 771 a 4 ed Electremic 4 13 device k Signalling Sensor Figure A 4 Electromagnetic Induced Noise lt ao Irneripr s M y d Power supply ET QA LU Lou E fe i1 1 13 Ml A 2j T Signal lina Sensor c ul 4l Figure A 5 Electrostatic Induced Noise S Radiation noise Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires that act as antennas at the input and output sides of the inverter so as to affect peripheral devices This noise is called radiation noise 5 as shown below Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may also act as antennas Power Inverter AM supply RA Electronic 1 Y device Figure A 6 Radiation Noise
440. ulation of Harmonic Current 1 Value of input fundamental current When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2 in Appendix of the Guideline you have to previously know the input fundamental current Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B 4 based on the kW rating of the motor irrespective of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used fcis If the input voltage is different calculate the input fundamental current in inverse gt proportion to the voltage Table B 4 Input Fundamental Currents of General purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings Applicable motor rating kW os ors is 22 oo ss os n as iss ms T rer e o o or e er s o fundamental current A 40v 031 E Ed 396 6 50 9 5 123 LE 24 9 30 7 App B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage 2 Calculation of harmonic current Usually calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub table 3 Three phase bridge rectifier with the smoothing capacitor in Table 2 of the Guideline s Appendix Table B 5 lists the contents of the Sub table 3 Table B 5 Generated Harmonic Current 96 3 phase Bridge Rectifier Capacitor Smoothing ACR 3 DCR Accumulated energy equal to 0 08 to 0 15 ms 100 load conversion Smoothing capacitor Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms 100 load conversion Load 100
441. un and frequency commands via communications link 1 during braking 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction 1 under current limiting control Table 3 12 Running Status Display 1 during running in the forward direction Notation Binary Hexa decimal on the LED monitor B Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 13 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Binary Hexadecimal Table 3 13 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 20 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 14 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 8 i e Power ON D o 09 T Running moda O m E mem 2 Y pee ep se al O Programming Prog nj c mode I e i i Z l Dese O i a o List af VO check item
442. un command source is digital input F02 1 Input terminal command JOG sme i keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Disable Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the key is held down Releasing the key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply so The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal i Note NEN A nm operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG m Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz1 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by FO1 takes effect by default Input termimal command Frequency command source Hz2 Hz1 Follow F01 Frequency command 1 Follow C30 Frequency comman
443. unction code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually 9 1 m Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true O false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect 1f the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Some signals cannot switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 using any of function codes E01 through E05 Function code data BX 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF 9 2 9 1 Function Code Tables The following tables list the f
444. unction codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions 3 Data Default Refer to Code Data setting range i i i copying setting page g FOO Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection 9 14 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference protection UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control DIO interface card option PGinterface card option RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by 9 15 terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV RUN STOP keys on keypad forward RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse F03 EE Seems o e EVE pe T 3 Table A 4 9 16 F04 Base eque 9090 pi re F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage d i i i Table A 4 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled eT for 400 V class Series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage HR V class series F07 Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 9
445. ure The cover on top of the Simply disconnect the inverter can be quickly power connector and removed replace the cooling fan Figure 1 9 B Information that contributes to equipment maintenance is displayed In addition to inverter maintenance information data that also take equipment maintenance into consideration are displayed Item Purpose Motor cumulative The actual cumulative running time of the equipment motor the inverter is being running time hr used with is calculated Example of use If the inverter is used to control a fan this information is an indication of the timing for replacing the belt that is used on the pulleys Number of starts The number of times the inverter starts and stops can be counted times Example of use The number of equipment starts and stops is recorded and so this information can be used as a guideline for parts replacement timing in equipment in which starting and stopping puts a heavy load on the machinery 1 1 Features B The alarm history records the latest four incidents Detailed information can be checked for the four most recent alarms Simple operation simple wiring B A removable keypad is standard equipment The keypad can be easily removed and reset making remote operation possible If the back cover packed with the inverter is installed and a LAN cable is used the keypad can be easily mounted on the equipment s control panel Z
446. urrent of Insulated Wires The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires HIV wires and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires B IV wires Maximum allowable temperature 60 C Table F 1 a Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Allowable current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C mm up to 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 lo A A A A 2 0 10 23 14 55 19 8 0 24 150 395 359 323 280 229 248 225 158 200 469 426 384 332 272 192 295 267 229 187 250 556 505 455 394 322 227 350 316 272 222 325 650 591 533 461 377 266 409 370 260 400 745 677 528 432 305 469 424 365 298 500 842 766 60 se 488 345 530 479 336 2 x 100 497 452 407 352 288 203 283 243 198 2 x 150 658 598 539 467 381 269 375 322 263 2 x 200 782 641 555 453 320 492 445 383 312 2 x 250 927 843 760 658 537 380 584 528 454 370 2x 325 985 888 768 628 444 682 530 433 2 x 400 881 720 509 782 707 608 496 B HIV wires Maximum allowable temperature 75 C Table F 1 b Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Allowable curren Ariwiring Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct reference value 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C mm up to 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 A Wire si
447. ut frequency of the inverter by referring to data of related function codes If the output frequency exceeds the upper limit given by the frequency limiter High F15 the controller automatically limits the output frequency at the upper limit If the overload prevention control is enabled the logic automatically switches the output frequency to the enabled side of overload suppression control and controls the output frequency accordingly Upon activating of the torque limiter the inverter automatically switch its output frequency to ones of the torque limiter and continues to run The terminal command TL2 TLI switches the level of torque limiting For the braking torque it limits the frequency control amount according to data of the function code H76 Upon activating of regeneration power suppression the inverter automatically switches its output frequency to ones of the regeneration power suppression mode and continues to run while lengthening the deceleration time consequently more than specified one For the braking torque it limits the frequency control amount according to data of the function code H76 as well as the torque limiting Upon activating of the current limiter the inverter switches automatically its output frequency to ones of the current limiter and continues to run Define the slip compensation involving the rated slip of the motor P12 the slip compensation gain for driving P09 and braking P11 separately for driving
448. valent to the setting for FVR E11S Accumulated operation time LED monitor shows the accumulated operation time Check with Menu 5_00 cumulative run time Trip history LED monitor shows the trip history Check with Menu 6_00 output frequency Data initializing 0 Disabled 1 Initializing data Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Auto reset Reset interval 0 Inactive 1 to 10 times 2to20s Auto reset Times Reset interval 0 Disable 1 to 10 2to20s Cooling fan ON OFF control 0 Inactive 1 Active Cooling fan ON OFF control 0 Disable 1 Enable ACC DEC pattern Liner S curve Weak S curve Strong Non linear Acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Linear 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear Start mode Rotating motor pick up Inactive Active Only auto restart after momentary power failure mode Active Starting mode Auto search 0 Disable 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start Energy saving operation 0 Inactive Active Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 0 or 1 Refer to F09 3 Equivalent to FVR E11S s F09 being set to 1 or 2 4 Equivalent to FVR E11S s F09
449. verage braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option M It Min volt Voltage unbalance 96 a NE MERCER EY x 67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 9 Note A box L1 in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series A T WNNNNN a Typa PAN EPS Dd OTs 15 22 ur paolo orinal meplis rentor WI L q 1 0 73 5 zz Iran Raigd capaciy hus E ii 15 2B amp 1 amp B Faled voltmgs v 3 Tamepo Mago m V asm am Pariin l Finini carat in 285 W 55 sa Dvericad capebilly 150 ol mind ke 1 iris 3008 04 0 Pendent Frnumiuz H2 5n BO Hz Fhian voltage PHE Thim phza 351 tn 40 w SCUERS Er ea a anaha Volga 00 1d 13 Colas oban 2 or inan 18 Frmzusncy 45 do Sd isim DEFI 0 85 15 3 0 ie 74 TB 144 listos CR LT 11 5H ni 11 0 wo Ti Requined power supply capaci 1004 ul 06 11 zl 26 43 T 10 Tuae 15 m E T 10 7 A 2 RE E T i i Tee DC brain Sheing rarus 0 1 to BOD Az iran irme UU Eni 1400 ec radio bevel Dio 10 of ried currenti Ried cimani j 3 Dati
450. xample 1 When the output level of the external sensor is 7 VDC Use terminal 12 since the voltage input is of bipolar Example When the external sensor s output is of bipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 100 To convert the output 7 VDC to 100 set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 143 as calculated below 10 V z 143 7N Feedback A 100 Input at terminal 12 7V 10V 9 106 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Example 2 When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC Use terminal 12 or C1 V2 function since the voltage input is of unipolar Example When the external sensor s output is of unipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100 Feedback i 100 om Input at termina 12 ow 10 v This example sets the dancer reference position around the 5 V 50 point m Remote command SV J02 J02 sets the source that specifies the command value SV under PID control Data for J02 Function Keypad Using the keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format For details of operation refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD PID command 1 Terminals 12 C1 C1 function C1 V2 function In addition
451. y kc Failed okogo v Pale corre A Owed cacacdits faded frequency ii Pred voLogo hequency Wolpe regency wanaha baih GOR imttow DCR Paqui pewa supot Expaziby Avo n Toue P T Rated currar 5 Inoue 55 h D braiing lirating irensisior Appiicable safety standards Prices i ECCE Coming maltad P Kama xad 2 3 4 5 6 27 8 Fuji 4 pole standard motor Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V Single phase 200 V class series Typa FAN 0 1 bd a 1 na 03 1 5 it Thioe phase 200 in 240 Y si AVR usction 04 15 30 inim 1 4 i25 150 mi red pueri lar 1 min TIA 038 50 Bl Hr Singhs phases 200 ho 240 SLD Hz Wage 1D to 10 Frequency 25 500 T8 11 10 25 13 13 54 03 04 oT Tu 100 150 Biring figure 01 Lo 6010 Hz Brain laesi O Lo E Bhin EG L2 7 Ho 14 ENMIITE m TD UL open tipa red cooling 06 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 10096 load The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 8 1 Standard Models 17 5 4 DEB a PE 7 40 Sal tae curari Geeky lime Q5 do 3003 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds
452. y 1 F05 Constant torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern Vif pattern 1 Voltage H51 a Output frequency Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA B Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque i Non Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequ
453. y for a short time Its time ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings This manual and associated catalogs list the allowable values KW obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable values kWs obtained from the discharging capability that can be discharged at one time Note that the torque value varies according to the inverter capacity q g pacity Selecting an optimal brake unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in the range below the short time maximum torque in the driving mode as shown in curve f For braking related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors 7 3 deyo Sal LIOVdVO H3 LH3ANI ANY HOLON TWWILdO ONILO3 T3S 7 1 2 Selection procedure Figure 7 3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters Items numbered 1 through 5 are described on the following pages You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times If there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time or acceleration and deceleration are frequent then the selection procedure is more complex START Saker capaci under the gondii of Conalanl aped Haning Tortue Raimi hara gt Ha Bciselaratice and decalara lion Long Raises iha capacity dasa ELI h calculated bra a cie
454. y improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy m Detection width of dancer position deviation J58 J58 specifies the bandwidth in 1 to 100 Specification of O does not switch PID constants m P Gain 2 J59 m Integral time 2 J60 m D Differential time 2 J61 Descriptions for J59 J60 and J61 are the same as those of PID control P Gain J03 I Integral time J04 and D Differential time J05 respectively 9 114 9 2 Overview of Function Codes J62 PID Control PID control block selection This function code allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer control processor output to the primary speed command and the PID processor output for the primary speed command either controls by the ratio 76 or compensates by the absolute value H2 Data for J62 Control function Decimal Bit 1 Bit 0 Control value type Operation for the primary speed command 0 0 0 Absolute value Hz Addition 1 0 1 Absolute value Hz Subtraction 2 1 0 Ratio Addition 3 1 1 Ratio Subtraction J63 J64 Overload Stop Detection value Overload Stop Detection level J65 Overload Stop Mode selection J66 Overload Stop Operation condition J67 Overload Stop Timer When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for the period specified by J67 the inverter activates the overload stop function accor
455. y of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period Terminals 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched on and off at one second intervals 6 deu S3009 NOILONNA The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Functions assigned Symbol Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 Inverter running RUN 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 2 1002 Frequency detected FDT 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 4 1004 Torque polarity detected B D 5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL 6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF 7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 21 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early w
456. y power failure which cannot be covered by the software 8 5 Specifies the high and low limits in Hz Setting range 0 to 400 Hz Bias of reference frequency and PID command can be independently set setting range Analog input gain can be set between 0 and 200 Three operation points and their common jump width 0 to 30 0 Hz can be set The inverter operates and stops for the time set with the keypad 1 cycle operation Restarts the inverter without stopping the motor after momentary power failure Limits the current by hardware to prevent an overcurrent trip from being caused by fast g deyo SNOI VOIJIO3dS Control Item Slip compensation Explanation Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load enabling stable operation Time constant can be changed Possible to enable or disable slip compensation during acceleration deceleration or in constant output range Remarks Droop control Decrease the speed according to the load torque Torque limiter Controls the output torque lower than the set limit value Can be switched to the second torque limit with digital input signal Soft start filter function is available when switching the torque control to 1 2 Software current limiter Keeps the current under the preset value during operation by software Overload stop Detects torque or current If the detected value exceeds the preset one this function stops
457. z or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher level of wind roaring sound In running special motors High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a higher rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is higher than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal overcurrent protection for motor Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for brake must be supplied from the inverter s primary circuit If the power supply for brake is
458. ze lo A 100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187 150 481 454 426 395 359 323 296 276 248 200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295 250 678 ex 60m 556 505 455 444 389 350 325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409 400 908 856 804 745 677 596 558 521 469 500 o8 99 se 76 60 er 631 589 530 2x10 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313 2x 150 802 756 658 598 539 526 493 46 44 2 x 200 954 899 844 782 641 625 586 547 492 2 x 250 927 843 760 741 695 648 584 A 23 M 600 V Cross linked Polyethylene Insulated wires Maximum allowable temperature 90 C Table F 1 c Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C mm up to 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 lo A A 2 0 21 3 5 29 5 5 39 38 228 218 208 197 186 174 152 145 137 129 60 30 292 279 264 249 234 203 195 184 173 5 9 100 420 402 384 363 342 321 280 268 253 238 150 556 533 509 481 454 426 371 355 335 316 200 661 633 605 572 539 506 440 422 398 375 250 783 750 678 ex 60m se 500 472 444 325 877 838 793 747 702 611 585 552 520 400 1050 1005 961 908 856 804 700 670 633 596 500 1187 1136 1086 1027 s 99 7e 757 673 2x100 700 670 e1 60m 571 536 467 447 422 397 2x150 927 888 848 802 756 592 559 526 2 x 200 1102 1055 1008 954 899 844 735

USER`S MANUAL - Power Drive Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents